Home

"user manual"

1. Address Name Contents n CFMDAT Same as data in read area n n 2 SCRN_COM Screen status n 1 SCRN_No Displayed screen number e CFMDAT n 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0j 0j10 L_ BZO Free BZ1 System reserved setting 0 Calendar setting L System reserved setting 0 e SCRN_COM n 1 Screen status 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 ojo OJO Overlap 0 Overlap 1 Overlap 2 System reserved setting 0 Serial extension l O Printer busy L Print data transferring L Backlight Analog RGB input Screen internal switching Screen forced switching L Data read refresh Global macro execution e SCRN_No n 2 Displayed screen number 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 System reserved setting 0 Screen number 2 1 n Connection Multi drop ED 2 1 n Connection Multi drop 1 n Connection One V7 series is connected to multiple PLCs Maximum connectable PLCs 32 V7 series CELE Max
2. ee Editor changes to Editor MJ1 and LS AER a E x communications with the V SFT editor become X possible Communications with the Communications with the e PLC programming software V SFT editor possible Trane Speed EASE o possible PORT 10000 Ei MAC 0050FF000035 o Editor MJ1 Editor When the F2 switch is held down for three seconds Editor MJ1 changes to Editor and communications with the PLC programming software become possible e Communicating statuses with the PLC programming software and the PLC during communications between the V SFT editor and the V7 series V SFT PLC programming software Writing to V7 Communications disconnected normal communications on completion of writing Reading from V7 Normal communications Comparing with V7 Normal communications 1 MITSUBISHI PLC 5 21 3 PLC programming software communication setting For communication specifications between the PLC programming software and the PLC the communication parameter settings for the V7 series and the PLC can be used Select Comm Parameter from the System Setting menu and check the settings in the Comm Parameter dialog e Baud rate setting There will be no problem if the setting for Baud Rate in the Comm Parameter dialog of the V SFT editor is not consistent
3. Self Loop Test Self Loop Test O Z 4 O E O I O O e gt 0 Ea 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu CN1 RS 485 Signal Test Turn the CN1 and RS485 switches on Communication Port CN1 RS232C MJ1 RS485 MJ2 e SD RD Test Check the signals SD and RD 1 Install a jumper between pins 12 and 24 and between pins 13 and 25 of CN1 on the backside of the V7 unit 2 Press the Self Loop Test switch When the OK lamp lights up the test is successfully completed Self Loap Test Self Loop Test If the NG lamp lights up consult your local distributor e CTS RTS Test Check the signals CTS and RTS 1 Install a jumper between pins 14 RTS and 19 CTS of CN1 and between pins 17 RTS and 18 CTS on the backside of the V7 unit 2 Press the RTS switch and check that both RTS and CTS lamps light up at the same time Press the RTS switch again and check that both RTS and CTS lamps go off at the same time CTS gt Self Loop Test JR Self Loo
4. RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 noe PES PLC Unit Port Connection PLC2Way ype CPU unit with built in C20H C28H C40H port RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O host link port C120 C120F ias i C200H RS 232C Wiring Diagram 3 O C500 C500F C120 LK201 V1 C1 000H C120 LK202 V1 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 Xx C2000 C2000H C200H C200H LK201 nn RS 232C Wi D C200HS CPU01 03 C200H LK201 V1 e iring Diagram 3 O C200HS CPU21 23 C200H LK202 e C200HS CPU31 33 C200H LK202 V1 Re tee Wiring Diagrania x C200HS CPU21 23 C200HS CPU31 33 CPU unit with built in CQM1 CPU21 port RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 O CQM1 CPU41 42 host link port 43 44 C500 C500F RS 232C Wiring Diagram 3 C1000H C500 LK203 C2000 C2000H RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 x SYSMAC C CPU unit with built in port RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 O C200HX host link port C200HG Mounted on the CPU RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 O C200HW COM02to RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 x 06 SRM1 C02 RS 232C interface RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 O CPU unit OMRON s cable CPM1A peripheral port CQM1 CIFO1 x RS 232C interface RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 O CPM2A CPU unit OMRON s cable peripheral port CQM1 CIFO1 x OMRON s adaptor unit CPM2C CIF01 O i RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 CPM2C CPU unit Wiring Diag peripheral port OMRON s cable CS1W CN118 O To be continued 2 OMRONPLC EEB
5. 35 2 e Panel Cut out Dimensions 289125 216 2 3 1 16 5 Dimensions and Panel Cut out V712 V712i External View and Dimensions Unit mm e Side View e Front View 326 4 245 2 259 6 O Fone e Rear View e Bottom View 312 00 000000 00000 l 245 2 63 8 gt e Panel Cut out Dimensions 3130 8 m 246 20 6 Names and Functions of Components 1 17 6 Names and Functions of a Components V708 V708i suolyeoyinads SIempleH 00000000 V710 V710i 000000 00 1 18 6 Names and Functions of Components V712 V712i 2 ppenonco0o 0000000 Connon 10 14 15 00 000 00
6. Maximum length PLC to the terminating V7 series 500 m RS 422 RS 485 connection e The PLC must be of the type of signal level RS422 RS485 with port numbers RS422 connection between the V7 series lt gt PLC must be in 2 wire connection e The V7 and V6 series can be used together 4 n 1 Connection Multi link Wiring Connection with Link Unit Use the RS 485 2 wire connection It is recommended that Hakko Electronics optional terminal converter TC485 be used e When TC485 is used Set 2 wire connection at the DIP switch SW1 on TC485 When a jumper is required on the PLC To the PLC s dp RS422 port of the oO TC485 TC485 TC485 i p Signal Shield Signal Shield Signal Shield link unit Name 7 Name i Name gt E ES lt v FG FG FG h O O ar a E Q SD a SD SD m T gt Send data 3 SD i SD SD e gt Senddata 3 po poa pod 1 i i RD pog RD 4 pod RD o 1 gt Receive data gt RD i i i RD i i i RD i i H i Receive data g TE yo yo 1 1 Vy SG SG SG 7 gt SG O a it 5 m n Terminating r
7. RS 232C i RS 485 i El obleki 0 PLCO e Communications between the server and the V7 series HKEtn10 dll for UDP IP protocol is provided so that the user can create an original application by using Visual C or Visual Basic etc to allow the server to access the memory device such as V7 internal memory memory card or the PLC memory linked with the V7 series as a host a The macro command SEND enables the V7 series to access the server b Server Ethernet lt V7 gt RS 232C I RS 485 lt PLC gt gt vetas GO Z 2 Q O o 3 3 Z gt O a 5 D ED Ethernet Screen data can be transferred from the V SFT editor on the server to the V7 series Server Ethernet Ethernet ready PLC lt RS 232C RS 485 lt PLC gt i Ola e Communications between the Ethernet ready PLC and the V7 series The V7 series can communicate with the PLC on the Ethernet Ethernet La Lal La O ME lt P
8. ds ae CPU Unit Port Connection PLC2Way ype JW50 JW70 JW100 y RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 JWS50H JW70H aU cea O JW series JW100H JW20 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 JW 31CUH renal JW100 70H JW70CU JW100CU RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 COM port JW70CUH JW100CUH Communication port on JW220U the CPU unit RS 422 Wiring Diagram 3 RS 232C PG COMM2 O JW20 Communication port 1 Wiring Diagram 2 COM port JW 32CUH on the CPU unit RS 422 JW 33CUH Communication port 2 PG COMM1 O on the CPU unit Wiring Diagram 5 PG COMM2 Wiring Diagram 5 O Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 for STA NO x10 1 for STA NO x1 1 Parity Even Even RS 422 4 wire system fixed Data length 7 7 Stop bit 2 2 Error check Sumcheck fixed Transmission mode Command mode fixed 3 SHARP PLC JW Series Link Unit Switch Setting Baud Rate 19200 bps Switch Setting Contents SWO 4 Command mode Swi 1 Station address lower half sw2 0 Station address upper half SW3 1 OFF Not used SW3 2 ON 4 wire system SW3 3 OFF Not used SW3 4 ON Even parity SW4 0 Baud rate 0 19200 1 9600 2 4800 3 2400 4 1200 5 600 SW7 ON Terminating resistance provided
9. 100 240VAC LON 3 Check that the battery is securely attached to the backside of the cover and connect the battery connector 4 Close the battery holder cover See operating or maintenance 5 Enter a date five years from now for Battery Replacement on the sticker on the battery holder chat The battery status is output to the internal memory s167 of the mc V7 series If the battery voltage drops before five years has Pit elapsed replace the battery immediately Enter a date five years from now E D o D oO Mm O D Q oh o S n o D WED 9 Coin type Lithium Battery MSB wer PEPE PPP S LSB ele o fofofofofofofof fo Reserved for memory cassette L 0 No memory cassette mounted information setting 0 1 FROM 2 Mbyte V6 6 Check that the battery is correctly connected on the Main Menu screen When the battery is not connected the SRAM Clock switch blinks and the message Battery not set is displayed at the bottom left corner When the battery is a correctly connected the SRAM Clock switch goes out and the message is cleared When the battery voltage has dropped the message Brownout Battery is displayed 2 FROM 4 Mbyte V6 3 SRAM 512 kbyte V7 V6 4 FROM 8 Mbyte V7 0 Battery OK 1 Battery voltage drop 2 No battery Reserved for memo
10. Local Port 3 Local Port 2 Local Port 1 Local Port 4 Sanos o so css 000 303660 8666066 CN1 MJ2 CN1 Hakko Electronics cable RS 485 connection V6 MLT 3 m CN1 PLC Communications between the V7 master station and the PLC depend on the communication speed set on the PLC The maximum available speed for the V7 series is 115 kbps which is higher than the one available with multi link connection described in 4 n 1 Connection Multi link This multi link connection is available with almost all the PLC models that support 1 1 connection refer to the Appendix The connection between the master station and the PLC is the same as the one for 1 1 connection Use the RS 485 2 wire connection between stations of the V7 series Please use Hakko Electronics multi link 2 master cable V6 MLT for connection between the master station Local Port 1 and the slave station Local Port 2 In the following cases multi link 2 connection is not available 1 A communication interface unit example OPCN 1 CC LINK Ethernet etc is used 2 The V7 series master or slave station is used for the temperature control network or PLC2Way function op oO D O 3 3 Cc
11. CN1 D sub 25 pin female Pin No Signal Name Contents 1 FG Frame ground 2 SD RS 232C send data 3 RD RS 232C receive data 4 RS RS 232C request to send 5 CS RS 232C clear to send 6 Not used 7 SG Signal ground 8 Not used 9 5V Use prohibited 14 e 10 oV Use prohibited 11 Not used 12 SD RS 422 send data ORAR o 13 SD RS 422 send data AAA 14 RS RS 422 RS send data 4 13 15 Not used 16 Not used 17 RS RS 422 RS send data 18 CS RS 422 CS receive data 19 CS RS 422 CS receive data 20 Not used 21 Use prohibited V708 not used 22 Use prohibited V708 not used 23 Not used 24 RD RS 422 receive data 25 RD RS 422 receive data 3 The following connector is recommended DDK make 17JE23250 02 D8A D sub 25 pin female metric thread with hood 12 Modular Jack MJ1 MJ2 12 Modular Jack MJ1 MJ2 gt a Modular Jack 1 MJ1 2 MJ2 z op 1 This is a modular connector used for connection for screen data transfer temperature g controller barcode reader card recorder CREC or serial extension I O V I O e O For V708 V708i For V710 V710i V712 V712i E Bottom View Bottom View AAN NAAA fe 000 000 B l 000000 ll gt 0 fal 2 Pins of modular jacks 1 and 2 correspond to signals as given below MJ1 2 Pin No Signal Name Contents 1 SD RD R
12. Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 7 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin male O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 Use shielded twist pair cables 12 GE Fanuc PLC 12 GE Fanuc PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection f i Programmable RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 90 series Pelee now coprocessor PCM RS 485 Wiring Diagram 2 90 series Series 90 micro Aa SNP X Series 90 30 CPU port RS 485 Wiring Diagram 3 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows 90 Series Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 01 0 for x10 1 x1 1 Parity Odd Odd a Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Functions Host link function fixed Response delay time 0 fixed Timeout None fixed ASCII HEX HEX fixed 90 Series SNP X Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Parity Odd Odd Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Functions SNP X fixed 12 GEFanucPLC MEE Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE
13. System Information FONT VF DRV VER 1 240 P System program version SYSTEM PROG VER 1 000 VER 1 300 1 000 1 000 MELSEC QnH Q PLC I F driver version ENGLISH CPU Port and model Screen memory Screen Data Information Size 5111808 mmunication parameter Multi link 2 or multi link A ee eo rea TE ult l or multi li Own Stat No 1 1 Signal Level RS232C Data Length 8 9 setting gt eed PLC Stat No 0 Stop Bit 1 Displayed when Multi Link or Baud Rate 115200 Parity Odd Multi Link 2 is selected for Me Send Delay 20msec Connection on the Comm Parameter dialog z Extension Ethernet Information Ethernet RGB Trans Speed 10BASE T Adjustment Port name used for data Stat No 192 168 1 68 ransfer oa PORT 10000 transie MAC 050FF000035 PLC model and file comment set Ethernet setting for the screen data file Displayed for V7i or communication interface unit CU 03 SRAM Clock Extension Initializes SRAM and adjusts calendar Indicates the driver setting and parameter setting for temperature data See page 2 27 controller PLC2Way communication ladder transfer function Modbus slave communication etc See page 2 28 Ethernet Sets the IP address See page 2 23 RGB Adjustment Appears when the option unit EU 01 is provided For more information refer Card Menu to the instruction manual for the EU 01 option unit Transfers
14. Memory TYPE Remarks N integer 0 B bit 1 TACC timer current value 2 T PRE timer set value 3 C ACC counter current value 4 C PRE counter set value 5 l input 6 O output 7 S status 8 T timer control 9 C counter control 10 R control 11 R LEN control data length 12 R POS control data position 13 D BCD 14 A ASCII 15 F FLOAT 16 ST STRING 17 O O 5 5 oO O e 5 Le Oo v O 19 11 Allen Bradley PLC PLC 5 Series Switch Setting 1785 KE SW1 Protocol No Setting Contents 1 ON 2 OFF BCC even no 3 OFF 4 ON Duplicated message unacceptable 5 OFF Handshaking signal ignored 6 ON Execution of diagnosis command SW2 Port Set the port number of 1785 KE This port should not be duplicated in the network No Setting Contents on 1st digit octal 2 ON 3 ON OFF 4 ON OFF 2nd digit octal 5 ON OFF 6 ON OFF 7 ON OFF 3rd digit octal 8 ON OFF SW3 Network link communication speed Adjust to the settings of the network you are using No Setting Contents l Ony Data highway 57 6 kbps 2 ON 3 ON 4 ON Link communication speed 19 2 kbps 5 ON 6 ON Local remote selection SW4 Spare No Setting Contents 1 OFF 2 OFF o OFF For extension always OFF 4 OFF 11 Allen Bradley PLC 1770 KF2 SW1
15. RS 422 Wiring Diagram 6 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 5 or KEYENCE s cable OP 26487 KZ 10 16 24 1 40 80 B 300 350 CPU modular port Connector OP 26485 KV series 2 RS 422 KEYENCE s cable KZ C20 Hakko Electronics cable MB CPUQ sare KZ 24 300 CPU modular port RS 232C Wiring Diagram 5 or KV10 24 9 KEYENCE s cable CPU KV 10 24 CPU modular port OP 26487 ps KV 700 CPU modular port Connector OP 26485 1 To connect KZ 24 300 via RS 232C select KZ24 300CPU for the PLC type on the V SFT editor 2 To connect KZ 10 24 via RS 232C select KV10 24CPU for the PLC type on the V SFT editor 18 KEYENCEPLC A Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows KZ Series Link Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Port 0 0 Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Parity Even Even ane Data length 7 ASCII 7 Transmission code Stop bit 2 2 Terminating resistance ON for RS 422 Set the port with the port setting switch the terminating resistance with terminator and the baud rate data bit parity stop bit with SET B DIP switches KZ A500 CPU CPU Modular Port Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Port 0 0 Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Parity Odd Odd aoe Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Terminating resista
16. Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC FG 1 o A gt D sub 9 pin male 6 YokoGawAPLC EZ RS 422 Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 7 YASKAWA PLC 7 YASKAWA PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection JAMSC IF60 JAMSC IF61 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 GL60 series JAMSC IF611 fica RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 memobus i Memobus port on the P i RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 GL120 GL130 series CPU module Wiring Diag f JAMSC 120NOM27100 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 6 PROGIC 8 PORT2 on the CPU unit RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 3 CP9200SH CP 2171F Wiring Diagram 4 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 7 CP9200SH MP900 Memobus port on the ja 3 MP920 CPU module RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 MP930 s RS 232C Wiring Diagram 3 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 8 Other PLCs can also be connected with Memobus Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Memobus Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 1 1 Parity Even Even ae Data length 8 bit RTU fixed Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Error check CRC fixed Port delay timer 0
17. Ext I O Check Printer Check Switch Check F1 F2 FS amp 5 amp amp 5 amp 5 amp amp amp 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO SYSTEM amp Function Switch Test a ae Check operations of eight switches provided vertically on the right side of the V7 panel Press the switch and check that the lamp on the screen lights up while the switch is held down 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 29 2 4 Touch Switch Test If a touch switch does not activate at all or if an operation is performed without pressing any touch switch check that the touch switches on the V7 panel are working properly 1 Press the Switch Check switch Grids appear on the screen as shown below x Y zZ Main Menu A sys gt g il
18. IL fe Q w D ie O D Q gt O 0 O n WED 5 Printer Connection PRINTER Connecting Cable e To connect the V7 series to a printer use Hakko Electronics printer cable V7 PT 2 5 m for 20 pin parallel interface V7 series Printer a Half pitch 20 pin Centronics 36 pin Compatible Printer Models Control code system e NEC PC PR201 series compatible with MS DOS computer e EPSON ESC P24 J84 ESC P J84 ESC super function compatible with MS DOS computer e CBM292 293 CBM s line thermal printer Screen hard copying is not possible Barcode printers It is not possible to print a screen hard copy data sheet or sampling data e MR400 Sato s barcode printer MR400 series Connection with Printer through Serial Interface e To connect a printer through serial interface connect the cable to a modular jack MJ1 MJ2 e Refer to the specification sheet of the printer to be used for the connecting cable for serial interface For information on MJ1 MJ2 signals refer to page 1 29 e When two printers are connected through parallel interface and serial interface the one connected to MJ1 MJ2 refer to page 1 29 for the setting takes precedence e Printer models and available print functions are the same as those for parallel interface MONITOUCH Operations 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu Initial Screen 1 Main Menu Screen I O Tes
19. O JW100 70H COM Port JW20 COM Port System Memory Setting 2 S The settings for communications with the V7 series should be made at the system memory as shown g below T e JW 70CU 100CU JW70CUH 100CUH JW22CU Q System Memory Setting Contents 236 30H Stop bit 2 bits parity even baud rate 192000 237 01H Port e JW 32CUH 33CUH Communication port 1 System Memory Setting Contents 234 30H Stop bit 2 bits parity even baud rate 192000 235 01H Port Communication port 2 System Memory Setting Contents 236 30H Stop bit 2 bits parity even baud rate 192000 237 01H Port ED v SHARP pic Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks X9XXX register 0 XXXXX relay 1 for word device EXXXX self diagnosis 2 bXXXX timer counter 3 Fn file register 7 1 1 File Register Setting on V SFT Editor Example F1 00002 Enter file number colon address in order Address Colon File number 3 SHARPPLC EE Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC FG 1 A 7 D sub 15 pin male O O 5
20. The error occurred due to some cause other than mentioned above suonye1adO HONOLINOW 2 24 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 4 Ethernet The Ethernet screen is displayed by pressing the IP Address English switch on the initial screen when transferring screen data via Ethernet for the first time or by pressing the Ethernet switch on the Main Menu screen when transferring screen data to the V7 series This screen is used for setting the IP address a number that identifies the V7 series on the network that is indispensable for Ethernet communications Depending on whether the LAN 10BASE T connector at V7i or the communication interface unit CU 03 for V7 is used the Ethernet screen contents and the required settings vary as described below Connection with LAN 10BASE T Connector at V7i Selects Not Use Network Table or Use Network Table Moves back to the Main Menu screen or Ethernet the initial screen Not Use Network Table i FA It is not used when the gate way or the sub mask is zero IP Address 0 0 ol Gate Way 20 0 C0 Sub mask 0 0 o Port No 10000 Cursor switches Increment Decrement switch for the value in the cursor position a Determines the setting such as IP address Connect 3 E Seto and moves back to the Main Menu s
21. lt PLC gt Server V7 series g al i 1 ere i E 0 fe lt PLC gt ezo Ethernet Ethernet 1 Ethernet 4 45 Error Display Error messages displayed on the V7 series and those stored in the system memory are explained Communication Errors The Ethernet status is stored in system memory address s518 of the V7 series during Ethernet communications The communication error occurs when a code other than 0 normal is stored in system memory address s518 e Inthe RUN mode When Continue is selected for Comm Error Handling in the Detail tab window of the Comm Parameter dialog a following screen is displayed Communication Error Etheme Eror0R Screen No Received Code No Retry Communication Error Ethernet Error XXXX_ OE Z 2 Q A O o 3 3 Z gt O 2 5 D The error number is displayed here e To check the occurrence of an error on the Main Menu screen Main Menu V710iTD 2002 4 1 07 23 30 System Information FONT VF DRV VER 1 310 SYSTEMPROG VER 1070 VER 4 300 1 000 1 000 YOKOGAWA FA M3 ENGLISH Et
22. D sub 25 pin male 2171F CN3 MR 8 male Use shielded twist pair cables 8 Toyopuc PLC 8 Toyopuc PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC L2 PC2 series PC3J Unit Port Connection TOYOPUG CMP LINK RS 422 Wiring Diagram 1 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even oe Data length 7 ASCII 7 Transmission code Stop bit 2 2 Set Trans Mode in the Detail tab window of the Comm Parameter dialog of the V SFT editor PC3J L2 PC2 series Select Single Data Area or Split Data Area Select Single Data Area Transmission Mode Contents Single Data Area Data area is common Split Data Area Each PLC device is divided into program files Switch Setting Baud rate 19200 bps Switch Setting Contents SWi 0 Station address lower half sw2 0 Station address upper half sw3 4 Baud rate 1 19200 2 9600 3 4800 4 2400 5 1200 6 600 Switch Short Bar Contents SET2 Provided Data length 7 bits SET3 Provided Stop bit 2 bits O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt oO v z O a Availa 8 Toyopuc PLC ble Memory The available memory setting range varies depending o
23. Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection Communication Port Lo T R T R RS 422 Wiring Diagram 1 TP02 TPO2 MMI Port 9pin 4 5 Short Computer RS 422 Wiring Diagram 2 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 1 1 Parity Not provided Not provided o Data length 7 7 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks D data register timerecounter contact 0 V timerecounter contact 1 WS system register 2 WC constant register 3 X input relay 4 Y output relay 5 Cc internal relay 6 SC special register 7 25 TAIANPLC EB Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 422 Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin male O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a RX TX GND 2 3 PG COM 4 5 7 8 Use shielded twist pair cables 26 SAIA PLC 26 SAIA
24. Write 1 Ethernet Write Words to PLC Memory int HKEtn_WritePlcMemory WORD sp unsigned short Wordcnt int DeviceType DWORD addr char IpAddr int DFlag 1 This function is retained until write completion is received from the V7 series It is reset on receipt of write completion to the PLC memory e Parameters sp Target block pointer Contents Word Count No 1 1 No 2 1 No n 1 Wordent Word count to be transferred max 2000 words DeviceType Address of the device to be written Refer to Chapter 5 Connection to PLCs addr Top memory address to be written For YOKOGAWA or YASKAWA PLCs specify a number 1 for the address addr Example D400 gt 399 D25 24 IpAdar IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX DFlag 0 1 2 Refer to page 4 29 Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError Z o 2 Q x O o 3 3 Cc gt O a 5 n 1 Ethernet Write Double words to PLC Memory int HKEtn_WritePlcMemory2 DWORD sp unsigned short Wordcnt int DeviceType DWORD addr char IpAddr int DFlag 1 This function is retained until write completion is received from the V7 series It is reset on receipt of write completion to the PLC memory e Parameters sp Wordent DeviceType addr IpAddr DFlag Return values Success Failure Error details Target block
25. Error Message Contents Solution I F Board Err The I F unit for NET 10 has an error Request Code Err The request command from NET 10 has an error Request Data Err The request data from NET 10 has an error Contact your local distributor Word Writing to Sp Relay MITSUBISHI A Series Word writing to a special relay M9000 and later is attempted Notes Only bit writing is possible for special relays when connecting with NET 10 Do not attempt to perform word writing to special relays e CC LINK Error Message Contents Solution I F Board Err The I F unit for CC LINK has an error Contact your local distributor No of Occupy Setting Err The number of occupy in Comm Parameter is different from the number of occupy by switches Check the setting of the number of occupy Network I O Access Err MONITOUCH is about to access exceeding the set number of input output words Check the memory for the network I O in the screen data file Station Number Err The port number set by a switch is not within the setting range 1 to 64 Specify the port number within the setting range Word Writing to Sp Relay Word writing to a special relay M9000 and later is attempted Notes Only bit writing is possible for special relays when connecting with CC LINK Do not attempt to perform word writing to special relays
26. O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 5 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC e D sub 9 pin male SG RDB E RDA SDB SDA 1 Use shielded twist pair cables 2 OMRON PLC Wiring Diagram 6 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Wiring Diagram 7 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male FG 1 7 12 Use shielded twist pair cables Use shielded twist pair cables PLC D sub 9 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin male 2 OMRONPLC EZB SYSMAC CS1 DNA When connecting the V7 series to CS1 on a network Controller Link the V7 series can also access another CS1 on the network O SO OSO V7 series V SFT Setting e Select System Setting gt Comm Parameter gt Detail tab and select 1 n for Connection e Select System Setting gt Network Table Setting gt PLC The network table edit window is displayed Double clicking on the number brings up the dialog where CS1 on the network can be registered Ele Edt view Help Set Network Table No 0 X ajaj aa Hee z Edit Network Table _ DNA Target Network p DATTarget Node Address P cees O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 O v O a 3 SHARP PLC 3 SHARP PLC Available PLCs
27. O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 21 FATEK AUTOMATION PLC FATEK AUTOMATION PLC 21 Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection RS 232 Wiring Diagram 1 FACON FB series FACON FB series FB DTBR Wiring Diagram 2 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 3 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Parity Even fixed o Data length 7 fixed Transmission code Stop bit 1 fixed Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks HR data register 0 DR data register 1 X input relay 2 Y output relay 3 M internal relay 4 S step relay 5 T timer contact 6 Read only Cc counter contact 7 Read only RT timer current value 8 RC counter current value 9 DRC 32 bit counter current value 10 21 FATEK AUTOMATION PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 15 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub
28. PORT 101 MAC 0050FF000035 0000080 0 POWER e When the SRAM Clock switch on the Main Menu screen is pressed the following SRAM Clock Adjustment screen appears This screen is used for adjusting the built in calendar and for initializing the SRAM area j i SRAM Clock Adjustment 002 2 19 18 44 Main Menu Date and Time Adjustment Date EE m KEN Time KA SEEE Format of SRAM Formats SRAM in the present screen dalnyps V7EM S mounted Extension V7EM S not mounted Built in The above is displayed Format Completed Format Execute 06000000 e POWER 2 28 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu Date and Time Setting 1 Move the cursor using the lt gt switch and change the value by pressing the 7 switch 2 When the desired date and time are set press the Set switch to determine the setting 3 The calendar data is updated as set Initializing SRAM When the SRAM memory or cassette is initialized the data contained is cleared Double check before initializing the SRAM memory or cassette 1 Extension is shown when V7EM S SRAM cassette is mounted Built in is shown when it is not mounted 2 Press the Format switch and the Execute switch The SRAM area is initialized in the current screen data format When initialization has be
29. QnH A Series CPU QnH Q Series CPU Communication parameters for the V7 series except the baud rate are automatically set The maximum baud rate available with the V7 series is 115200 bps Select the appropriate baud rate depending on the used PLC and environment FX Series CPU FX2N Series CPU FX1S Series CPU Communication parameters for the V7 series are automatically set FX Series Link A Protocol Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Parity Even Even PS Data length 7 7 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 A ae O Protocol Special protocol communication fixed 3 H W type 1 Normal RS 232C RS 232C 3 Sumcheck Added fixed L Transmission mode Mode 1 Trans Mode 1 o v 1 Select RS 485 when the link unit FX2N 485 BD FX2N 422 BD FX1N 485 BD FX1N 422 BD or O 17 FXON 485 ADP is used We recommend to set 2 ms or above for Send Delay Time in the Detail tab window of the Comm Parameter dialog of the V7 series Gt wTsusisui Pic A Series Link QnA Series Link Switch Setting The following is an example that shows the settings for both rotary DIP switches and DIP switches on the PLC AJ71UC24 Example 1 Signal level RS 232C baud rate 19200 bps transmission mode 1 STATION No STATION No MODE x1 Sw11 Sw12 Sw13 swi4 sw15 Sw16 OFF SW17 ON A1SJ
30. Top memory address Address of the target Network table number of the source Contents Two words starting from u100 in V7 B are transferred to server A Ethernet lt V7 B gt 250 300 lt PLC B gt yer Z o 2 Q x O o 3 3 Cc gt O a 5 n ED it Ethernet System Memory The Ethernet status is output to the system memory s of the V7 series This section explains the memory addresses s514 to 619 where the Ethernet status is output For other memory addresses refer to the Reference Manual Function List Address Contents s514 Macro user request wait 0 absent 1 present 515 Result of executing the macro user request wait 516 517 518 Ethernet status 519 520 Network table 0 status 521 Network table 1 status 522 Network table 2 status 523 Network table 3 status 524 Network table 4 status 525 Network table 5 status 526 Network table 6 status 527 Network table 7 status 528 Network table 8 status 529 Network table 9 status 530 Network table 10 status 531 Network table 11 status 532 Network table 12 status 533 Network table 13 status 534 Network table 14 status 535 Network table 15 status 536 Network table 16 status 537 Network table 17 status 538 Network table 18 status 539
31. Transfer Display lt Card eee eee eee ms Data selection Transfer selection CREC Menu CREC Menu Return Return Memory Card Information A Memory Card Information Sys Program Sys Program jon ma Version Font Date a Version see aa a Display lt Card I F Driver YOKOGAWA FA Version 1 250 Version 1 250 Screen PLC Type YOKOGAWAFA M3 isplay gt Card Screen PLC Type YOKOGAWAFA M3 Screen Comment Screen Comment Data Selection Display lt gt Card Start Screen Data Font Data Cancel VF Driver Sys Program Cancel O Z 4 O E O I O O e gt n 2 14 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 5 Starting Data Transfer Press the Start switch Data transfer is started During data transfer the Start switch changes into Busy and flashes When data is transferred the following message is displayed CREC Menu CREC Menu Return Memory Card Information Memory Card Information Sys Program Version mo Font Date gt EAE i ne Version 0 2 20 7 E YOKOGAWA FA mae UF Driver YOKOGAWA FA PE Samoan 1 250 Version 1 250 YOKOGAWAFA M3 Display gt Card Screen PLC Type
32. Indicates the details of the folder Determines the folder selection Folder Detail Rest Size 29437KB OK A e POWER e Select the desired folder using the 7 Y switch and press the OK switch The Card Transfer screen is displayed again and the CF card file information of the selected file is indicated e To see the details of the folder press the Folder Detail switch The Folder Detail screen is displayed Folder Detail 30 Folder Name DSP0000 BIN Moves the cursor Scrolls with the 1 N switch Moves back to the Select Folder screen Folder Selection ree Rest Size 29437KB A eG WEBSERV OS POWER O Z 4 O E O I O O D g gt 0 2 18 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 4 Press the Select Data switch The Data Selection window is displayed and the Select Data switch changes to Start Card Transfer CF Card File Infomation Access Folder Name AAAAAAAA CF Card File Infq Data Selection Folder Name AAAAAAAA DSP0000 BIN 2002 03 20 10 58 56 Rest Size 29437KB DSP0000 BIN Select All Rest Size 29437KB Screen Data Sys Program V710 V71
33. Memory Constant GSq pesignation word P Address FO O O O O F1 O O O F2 O O O O ES O O EWRITE Write to memory EWRITE FO F1 F2C F3 Example Macro command at the V7 A The macro command for V7 A to write data in V7 A to PLC B is shown below Description EWRITE D100 B u100 C 2 Address of the target Network table number The number of words to be transferred Top memory address Top memory address of of the target the source Contents Two words starting from u100 in V7 A are written into D100 in PLC B Ethernet u100 101 lt V7 A gt lt V7 B gt z 1 D100 101 lt PLC A gt Tel 3 F men lt PLC B gt J FE 1 Ethernet 4 21 SEND Words from the FO memory are transferred to the server of the network table number specified for F2 F1 designates the number of words to be transferred Usable Devices Internal PLC Memory Indirect Double Memory Memory Constant Card Designation word IP Address FO O O O O F1 O O F2 O O O SEND Send to server SEND FO C F1 TO F2 Example Macro command at the V7 B The macro command for V7 B to transfer data to server A is shown below Description SEND u100 C 2 TO A The number of words to be transferred
34. SD Use shielded twist pair cables 29 Automationdirect PLC Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC FG Modular connector 6 pin SG 1 RxD 3 TxD 4 654321 Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male 4 PLC Use shielded twist pair cables 1 High density D sub 15 pin Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC FG 1 aa at Sar it ye TN D sub 15 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 29 Automationdirect PLC GEB RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC CACA ee O D sub 25 pin male SG 7 RXD 9 RXD 10 CTS1 11 TXD1 14 TXD1 16 ci i RTS1 18 CO uJ as ee a Use shielded twist pair cables RTS1 19 CTS1 23 Wiring Diagram 6 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 In case SU 6M it is possible to use terminal blocks Use shielded twist pair cables GE 29 Automationdirect PLC Please use this page freely Le ESA 2 MONITOUCH V7 Hakko Electronics Co Ltd Sales 238 Kamikashiwano machi Matto shi Ishikawa 924 0035 Japan TEL 076 274 2144 FAX 076 274 5208 Tokyo Office TEL 03 3255 0166 FAX 03 3255 0298 Osaka Office TEL 06 6385 8234 FAX 06 6385 7851 Nagoya Office TEL 052 789 0096 FAX 052 789 0098 H
35. SD RD lt RS 232C Connection gt e Connection example with MITSUBISHI A1SJ71UC24 R2 V7 series Modular jack 8 pin PLC Ls A 7 D sub 9 pin male Yn E SD Yellow ES I I RDOrange 7 i 1 1 sare iT l 1 1 1 1 1 Use the shielded cable CS op oO D O 3 3 Cc gt O O mn ED pco lt RS 485 Connection gt e Connection example with MITSUBISHI A1SJ71UC24 R4 1 set V7 series Modular jack 8 pin SD RD Black SD RD Green SG Red Use the shielded cable e Connection example with MITSUBISHI A1SJ71UC24 R4 3 set V7 series Modular jack 8 pin PLC PLC PLC FG e e FG SD RD Black SDA SD RD Green SDB SG Red JE RDA a RB ON SG SG v vo v Terminating Use shielded Terminating Use shielded Terminating cable resistance twist pair cables resistance twist pair cables resistance ON OFF ON Terminating Resistance Setting e The terminating resistance of the V7 series should be set on the DIP switch in the backside of the unit e When MJ1 is used Set DIPSW6 to the ON position When MJ2 is used Set DIPSW8 to the ON position 1 MJ2 modular jack 2 terminating resistance CF auto load Not used CN1 RD terminatin
36. Yellow TXD Black SD RD Green SD RD RS 232C V7 series 1 set 2 V6 TMP RS 232C 14 possess RS 232C 1 RS 422 PLC RS 485 Wiring example of above a V7 series Modular jack 8 pin Computer D sub 9 pin female Pro 2 Por 3 po Signal Name Pin No TXD Yellow 8 RXD Orange 7 AA IN 6 v Link EE RS 485 V7 series maximum 31 sets E RS 232C gt RS485 conversion Modular jack 8 pin Modular jack 8 pin Signal Name Pin No Signal Name Pin No Terminal block Terminal block RS 485 V6 TMP 0 O Port 31 D i T O i 1 Q Heri RS 232C 3 RS 422 2 PLC PLC PLC RS 485 2 0 5 m recommended 1 0 m maximum o o Wiring example of above a and b RS 485 Terminal Terminal Signal Signal Signal Name Name Name FG 5 IN FG ION AAA FG e i i t t N t i gt EI ees A z SG M Pa SG i ss 1 x i SG v7 V7 FG Black 4 FG Black 1 a UA BS Green 2 et SG 5 pa EZB ae V Link V SFT Setting The V SFT settings required for V Link are explained V Link Setting 1 Click System Setting gt V Link Setting 2 The V Link Setting dialog is displayed 3 Check O Use MJ port as V
37. 02 gt CC Link 03 gt Ethernet FL net OPCN 2 04 PROFIBUS DP E 05 gt MELSECNET 10 communication interface unit Used for communications with each network This unit enables connection of multiple V7 series to a single PLC Since other devices on the same network can be connected it brings about the reduction in costs of the whole system V6 CP screen data transfer cable 3 m Used for connection between the V7 series and a personal computer or a personal computer and the card recorder CREC V7 PT printer cable 2 5 m Used for connection between the V7 series and a printer V6 BCD barcode reader connection cable 3 m Used for connection between the V7 series and a barcode reader 2 Models and Peripheral Equipment V6 MLT multi link 2 master cable 3 m Used for Multi Link 2 connection between the V7 master station and the V7slave station V6 TMP temperature controller connection cable 3 m Used for connection between the V7 series and a temperature controller or a PLC via PLC2Way MJ D25 MJ to D sub conversion cable 0 3 m under development Used for connection between the V7 series and a PLC via PLC2Way V7xx GS xx 08 gt V708 V708i 10 gt V710 V710i 12 gt V712 V712i protective sheet This sheet protects the operation panel surface 5 sheets set V7xx GSN10 xx 08 gt V708 V708i 10 gt V710 V710i 12 gt
38. 03H 43H36H ODH OAK 6 V Link 3 27 Data Items for Protocols e Transmission control code 1 byte Signal Name Code Hexadecimal Contents STX 02H Start of transmission block ETX 03H End of transmission block CR ODH Carriage return LF OAH Line feed e V7 port number 2 bytes Port numbers are used so that the host computer can identify each V7 series for o access The data range is from 01H to 1FH 1 to 31 and is converted into the ASCII D code before use The port number of the V7 series should be set on the V SFT editor O Refer to V SFT Setting S e Command 2 bytes 2 Available commands are shown below seb Name Code Hexadecimal ASCII Contents el Read 20H 32 30 Read from memory o Write 21H 32 31 Write to memory e The number of words to be read or written 2 bytes Set the number of words to be read or written by one command The data range is from 01H to FFH 1 to 255 and is converted into the ASCII code before use e Memory address to be read or written 18 bytes Specify the memory address to be accessed Set the following code in the format as shown for Read target memory setting on page 3 25 and Write target memory setting on page 3 26 Model Code Hexadecimal ASCII V7 series internal memory 00H 3030 16 bit 01H 3031 PLC memory 32 bit 81H 3831 Memory card 02H 3032 16 bit 03H 30
39. 1 CS 4 Ny l 7 500 Mia O Use shielded twist pair cables 5 MATSUSHITA PLC 5 41 9 MATSUSHITA PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection FP1 RS 232C port on the CPU unit RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 EP3 AFP3462 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 AFP3463 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 FP5 AFP5462 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 FP10 RS 232C tool port on the CPU unit RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 AFP5462 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 RS 232C port on the CPU unit RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 MEWNET FP10S AFP3462 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 AFP3463 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 EPO RS 232C tool port on the CPU unit pala eas oreseuitable RS 232C port on the CPU unit RS 232C Wiring Diagram 3 EDO RS 232C tool port on the CPU unit pod aad RS 2320 cable RS 232C port on the CPU unit RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 x 10 1 x 1 1 Parity Even Even PE Data bit 7 ASCII 7 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Transmission mode Computer link function fixed Control signal Invalid fixed If a tool port the ladder port for RS 232C is used the range of PLC parameter setting is limited as below Adjust the PLC parameter setting to co
40. 3 Z gt O a 5 a 1 Ethernet 2 Communication parameter setting e Select System Setting gt Comm Parameter Set the PLC to the V7 series which is connected When the network table is not set x Network table No 0 is displayed Main Detai It is not possible to select an option 19200BPS Baud Hate for Connect To Select System SignalLeva A52320 A422 Setting gt Network Table Setting gt ReadArea pooo Ethernet The Edit Network Table wite ares poo sStCSCSC C i window is displayed Set the I Read wite Area GD 80 Compatible network table and then go back to Celender IS the communication parameter j M Use Ethemet setting For more information on t o network table editing refer to page 4 14 When the network table is set The IP addresses that are set on the network table are displayed Select the IP address of the desired PLC Default ok Cancel Apply TF Read write Area GD 80 Compatible Calendar SuTs330 6 Y Use Ethemet Connect To 0 192 168 1 58 PLC Default OK Apply Click here A drop down list is displayed 1 Ethernet e When communicating with multiple PLCs same model on the Ethernet select 1 n for Connection on the Detail tab window Main 1 Detail Connection in yl Setting LocaiNo r Comm Err Handling Pals Even E G Stop C Continuous Trans Mode led m Data Length o E B
41. Click this menu when canceling monitor registration 1 Ethernet e View menu The items with a check mark are shown on the network table editing window View Help Y6NetCfgMin untitled Edit Network Table 2 5 x 1 y ToolBar File Edit view Help 2 Status Bar Editing the Network Table Double click the number Y6NetCfgMin untitled Edit Network Table Set Network Table No 0 El Elle Edit view Help ajaj ale ele e HostName mooo Edit Network Table IP Address 192 168 1 68 o Y tost Neme 1P adress Send Timeout Internal meme e IT Use receive send port of corrected PLC separately Port No 10000 Connected PLC Send Fort No 10000 r Select Port 10BASE T C AUI r Memory Protect IT Internal Memory TF Memory Card Memory I Default Gateway I Sub Net Mask boo Cox _ Coca The Set Network Table No dialog is displayed Host Name Set the name for the V7 series etc to be used on the Ethernet IP Address Set the IP address When registering Ethernet ready PLC set the same IP address as that of the PLC For the setting procedure of the IP address on the PLC see the manual attached to each PLC When registering a computer as the server set the same IP address as that of the computer When setting the IP address on the computer open Property of TCP IP in Network on the Windows To connect to the intra company network con
42. DWORD addr int BitNo int Page 4 39 Bit OnFlag char IpAddr 9 Internal memory int HKEtn_WritelnternalBitMemory int DeviceType DWORD addr int Bit BitNo int OnFlag char IpAddr 7 a 7 Page 4 40 Memory card int HKEtn_WriteCardBitMemory int FileNo int RecordNo DWORD addr int memory Bit BitNo int OnFlag char IpAddr e Others Initialization function int HKEtn_Init unsigned short Port 10000 int Retry 3 int RecvTime 2 int RecvTime2 10 Page 4 41 Receive wait from V7 int HKEtn_Recvfrom BYTE dp short lpCnt Cancel receive wait function void HKEtn_Cancel void Request corinection int HKEtn_Getinf struct inf Ipinf char IpAddr information Page 4 41 Close processing int HKEtn_Close Get source s A A IP Address int HKEtn_GetSinAddr char IpAddr Get error contents int HKEtn_GetLastError Page 4 43 1 Ethernet 4 29 Read Read Words from PLC Memory int HKEtn_ReadPlcMemory WORD dp unsigned short Wordcnt int DeviceType DWORD addr char IpAdadr int DFlag 1 This function is retained until PLC data is transferred from the V7 series e Parameters dp Target pointer of the data to be read Contents Word Count No 1 1 No 2 1 No n 1 Z o Wordcnt Word count to be read max 2000 words S DeviceType Address of the device to be read Refer to Chapter 5 Connection to A PLCs 9 addr Top memory address to be read For YOKOGAWA or YASKAWA PLCs specify a number 1
43. E E Nes Serial Communications 1 1 Connection 1 n Connection Multi drop n 1 Connection Multi link 2 n 1 Connection Multi link Universal Serial Communications V Link PLC2Way Temperature Control Network 1 1 1 Connection 3 1 1 1 1 Connection 1 1 Connection e One set of the V7 series is connected to one PLC 1 1 connection V7 series CN1 9 6666 ajo RS 232C or RS 422 RS 485 m oO D O 3 3 Cc gt O O mn e The host link unit of the PLC or the CPU port is used and the V7 series master station establishes communications according to the protocol of the PLC Consequently it is not necessary to have the dedicated communication program on the PLC slave station The V7 series reads the PLC memory for screen display It is also possible to write switch data or numerical data entered through the keypad directly to the PLC memory V7 series 6066 0 0j0 1 1 1 Connection Wiring lt gt DANGER Electric shock hazard Shut the power off before connecting cables Prepare the communication cable with the PLC on your side Refer to the following information for the cable For more information on the connection to respective PLCs refer to Chapter 5 Connection to PLCs RS 232C Connection e Connect the shielded cable either to the V7 series or PLC
44. E O 6 T Printer Check Switch Check 1 JF 2 Fa Return C O f O a F 3 ES Erase D o O gt n 2 Press a position on the panel and check that the pressed position turns white The white color means that the touch switch activates correctly To move back to the I O Test screen press the F4 switch To delete white dots press the F5 switch X 348 Y 337 Return i Fs Erase i 3 If a position different from the pressed position turns white refer to Touch Switch Adjustment on the next page and adjust the touch switch position 2 10 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu Touch Switch Adjustment If a position different from the pressed position turns white on the touch switch test screen follow the steps described below to adjust the touch switch position 1 Hold down the SYSTEM switch and press the F2 switch on the touch switch test screen The Touch Switch Adjustment screen appears x fe ma OY STEM gt Touch Switch Adjustment F2 Return tes Erase Touch the flickering corner The last position you touched is the setting value 2 Press on 1 that is flashing at the corner on Touch the fickering comer a i The last position you touched is the setting value t
45. O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 Use shielded twist pair cables 10 KOYO PLC 10 KOYO PLC Available PLCs K protocol CPU unit Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection i 4 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 SU 5 5E 6B 5M 6M U01 DM RS 422 Wiring Diagram 3 SU 5E 6E i RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 Universal port 1 on CPU RS 422 Wiring Diagram 7 SU 5M 6M Universal port 3 on CPU RS 485 Wiring Diagram 8 Universal port 2 on CPU RS 232C KOYO s programmer PORT2 on CPU connecting cable S 30JG E SZ 4 universal communication port KOYO s conversion connector S 15CNJ RS 232C KOYO s programmer SU SG connecting cable S 30JG E PORT2 on CPU SZ 4M universal KOYO s conversion connector communication port S 15CNJ KOYO s conversion connector S 15HCNP1 y RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 SG 8 db RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 Popeye RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 neral e RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 PZ3 communication port on RS 485 Wiring Diagram 6 the CPU unit g Viagram 5 U01 DM RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 3 SR T SR 6T Toyota version G01 DM RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 SRT SR 1T Toyota version Terminal Dies omine RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 To be continued 10 KOoYOPLC E Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection SU 5E 6B
46. PCD7 F110 Use shielded twist pair cables 27 MOELLER PLC 27 MOELLER PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Connection PS4 PS4 201 MM1 PRG port RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 ZB4 303 KB1 Cable made by MOELLER Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port 1 1 Parity Not provided Not provided a Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks M marker 0 MW as word device 27 MOELLERPLC EXE Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 sub 25 pin male Oo PLC e D sub 9 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a 28 Telemecanique PLC 28 Telemecanique PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Connection TSX Micro TSX Micro RS 485 Wiring Diagram 1 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and
47. Protocol No Setting Contents 1 ON Protocol 2 OFF Protocol 3 ON Duplicated message unacceptable 4 OFF Handshaking signal ignored 5 OFF Protocol SW2 SW3 SW4 Port Set the port number of 1770 KF2 This port should not be duplicated in the network SW5 Network link communication speed Adjust to the settings of the network you are using Switch Setting 7 7 Contents 9 ON ON 57 6 kbps z 2 o SW6 asynchronous link communication speed 3 Adjust to the settings of the V7 series No Setting Contents 5 1 OFF 2 ON 9600 bps 3 ON 4 ON Execution of diagnosis command SW7 Network link selection Switch Setting Contents 1 2 ON OFF Peer transmission link SW8 RS 232C RS 422 selection Switch Setting Contents 1 2 OFF ON RS232C ON OFF RS422 11 Allen Bradley PLC SLC500 Series Micro Logix 100 Transmission Parameter Setting CPU Port Channel 0 Set up the parameters for CPU port channel 0 using the software specifically designed for this purpose Baud Rate 19200 Duplicate Detect ON ACK Timeout x 20 ms 20 Control Line No Handshaking Parity EVEN Error Detection BCC NAK Retries 3 ENQ Retries 3 Embedded Responses 1747 KE AUTO DETECT Set up the parameters for 1747 KE using the software specifically designed for this purpose DF1 Port Setup Menu Baudrate B
48. Trans Mode in the Detail tab window of the Comm Parameter dialog of the V SFT editor Transmission Mode Contents Trans Mode 1 BCD w o sign Trans Mode 2 BCD w signs 1 BCD w signs Data in the PLC memory can be shown as data with signs When higher 4 bits in the memory indicates F or A it is treated as negative F Regards higher 4 bits as 0 A Regards higher 4 bits as 1 e Displayable range 1word 1999 to 9999 2 words 19999999 to 99999999 Example PLC Memory Indication on V7 0000 to 9999 0 to 9999 F001 to F999 1 to 999 A000 to A999 1000 to 1999 00000000 to 99999999 0 to 99999999 F0000001 to F9999999 1 to 9999999 A0000000 to A9999999 10000000 to 19999999 e Setting procedure Num Data Display Input Type BCD Display Type DEC w sign w signs 2 OMRONPLC EZB Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs SYSMAC C Memory TYPE Remarks DM data memory 0 CH input output relay 1 HR holding relay 2 LR latch relay 3 AR alarm relay 4 T timer current value 5 C counter current value 6 EMn extensional data memory 7 1 TU tim
49. Wiring Diagram 1 to the D sub 15 pin side for communications with the V7 series 2 Specify the absolute memory address For more information refer to the instruction manual for the PLC ED micro Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows COMM 2H Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 for both ST No x10 x1 0 Parity Even Even RS 232C MODE7 Protocol 2 with port Transmission mode z RS 422 MODE9 Protocol 2 with port o Data length 7 ASCII 7 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Sumcheck Provided fixed If the transmission mode is any type other than listed the above set the mode as shown below Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting MODE1 Protocol 1 without port a RS 232C MODE2 Protocol 1 with port Transmission mode MODE9 Protocol 2 without port RS 422 MODE2 Protocol 1 with port 1 Multi link connection is not available CPU module The peripheral port setting should be transmission control protocol 1 without port No other setting is available HIDIC S10a Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate Y 19200 bps 4 HITACHI PLC HIDIC H Switch Setting Baud rate 19200 bps MODE switch To connect to both RS 232C and RS 422 set MODE switch to 9
50. counter set value 8 CN counter enumerated value 9 C counter contact 10 Read only 22 IDEC PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 PLC D sub 25 pin male D sub 9 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a 23 MODICON PLC 23 MODICON PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Modbus RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port 1 1 Parity Even Even o Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks 4 holding register 0 3 input register 1 0 output coil 4 1 input relay 6 Read only 23 MODICONPLC EXE Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC SS D sub 9 pin male O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O
51. lt a 3 times longer response time vy E than cyclic transmission To achieve high speed communications use cyclic C Network No 2 transmission 4 CC Link 4 CC Link CC Link e CC Link is the network that is developed by MITSUBISHI Electric Corporation The V7 series works as a local station intelligent device station e To use CC Link communications on the V7 series the communication interface unit CU 02 must be mounted When the V7 series is equipped with the communication interface unit CU 02 it becomes a CC Link ready device e For communications with the PLC no program is required in the same way as communications via a link unit e It is possible to perform high speed communications by connecting multiple remote local stations to one master station PLC Example System configuration with two V7 series PLC Master station ee Z 2 Q O o 3 3 Z gt O a 5 a Terminating resistance CC Link CC Link ready product ready product Robot Solenoid valve O V702 Terminating resistance e For more information refer to the Specifications for Communication Unit CC Link O 5 OPCN 1 OPCN 1 OPCN 1 e To use OPCN 1 communications on the V7 series the comm
52. on delay timer set value 9 TC on delay timer elapsed value 10 US one short timer set value 11 UC one shot timer elapsed value 12 CS up down counter set value 13 CC up down counter elapsed value 14 DW data register 15 E event register 16 EW as word device S system register 17 SW as word device J transfer register 18 JW as word device Q receive register 19 QW as word device M extensional internal register 20 MW as word device HIDIC S10 ABS Memory TYPE Remarks 0E 0 06 1 18 2 19 3 1A 4 1B 5 1C 6 1D 7 4 HITACHI PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 15 pin male Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC li ee ee nas D sub 9 pin female Use shielded twist pair cables O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a Z micro Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 PLC D sub 25 pin male D sub 9 pin female 1 my my Na AN Use shielded twist pair cables RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 5 When connecting to the S10xa series add a resistor of 50 Q 1 2 W as shown below V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male e A LON fey fe DA L 1 l 1 1 i E l 1 i I l 1 i ane 1 ie TA 1 I 500 i
53. 00 OPCN 1 x O 0 Oo oO O 0 Oo O 0 CU 01 T LINK x O 0 Oo O oO 0 O oO 0 CU 02 CC Link x O Oo 0 O O 0 O O Oo CU 03 Ethernet FL net A o o o o o 0 o o x CU 04 PROFIBUS DP x O 0 0 O O 0 O O 0 CU 05 MELSECNET 10 x O 0 0 O Oo 0 O ie 0 1 This is not possible when the V7 series and the PLC are connected via Ethernet WED 2 Modular Jack MJ1 MJ2 Transferring Screen Data e Use modular jack 1 MJ1 when transferring screen data e When Editor Port is selected for Modular Jack 1 on the V SFT editor it is possible to transfer data in the RUN mode because the RUN STOP mode on the Main Menu screen can be automatically selected Also RUN STOP mode is automatically selected for on line editing and simulation e When an option other than Editor Port is selected for Modular Jack 1 select the STOP mode on the Main Menu screen and transfer screen data Simulation or on line editing is not available e When transferring screen data use Hakko Electronics data transfer cable V6 CP 3 m to connect the V7 series to a personal computer Barcode Reader Connection e Itis possible to receive the signal from a barcode reader by connecting the barcode reader at the modular jack MJ1 2 of the V7 series e To connect a barcode reader to the modular jack MJ1 2 use Hakko Electronics optional cable V6 BCD 12345678 Length 3 m wit
54. 000000 0 i PUES 5 6 7 8 9 Display This is the display unit Power Lamp POWER llluminates green when the power is supplied to the V7 series Function switches Used for RUN STOP selection contrast adjustment brightness adjustment and backlight ON OFF according to the setting These switches can be used as user switches in the RUN mode CF card connector CF This is the connector where the CF card is inserted Printer connector PRINTER Used for printer connection Modular jack connectors MJ1 MJ2 Used for screen data transfer and connection with temperature controller barcode reader CREC etc PLC communication connector CN1 Used for connection between the V7 series and a PLC or an external control unit computer custom controller etc 10BASE T connector LAN V7i only Used for Ethernet connection Power input terminal block Supplies the power to the V7 series 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC 6 Names and Functions of Components 1 19 10 Mounting holes Used for inserting fixtures when securing the V7 series to the mounting panel 11 Communication interface unit connector CN5 This is the connector where the communication unit CU xx optional for OPCN 1 T LINK CC Link Ethernet FL net OPCN 2 PROFIBUS DP or MELSECNET 10 is mounted 12 Option unit connector CN6 ee V7i only This is the connector where the option unit EU xx for video sou
55. 115 kbps Set the baud rate used for communications between the V7 series The setting must be the same as other V7 series on the same communication line For Total and Baud Rate of Multi Link the same values must be set on all the V7 series that are connected in the same communication line 3 Make the following setting when 1 is set for Local Port on the Comm Parameter dialog on the V7 series master station Select System Setting gt Modular Jack Select Multi Link for Modular Jack 1 or Modular Jack 2 Connect the multi link 2 master cable V6 MLT to the modular jack selected for Multi Link Communication Error e When the master station has a communication error the slave stations do not work and the communication error Time out is displayed When the V7 series slave station has a failure a communication error occurs only on this station m oO D O 3 3 Cc gt O 2 3 n 3 16 4 n 1 Connection Multi link 4 n 1 Connection Multi link Multi link e One PLC is connected to multiple V7 series Maximum connectable V series 32 V7 series No 1 V7 series No 2 V7 series No 3 V7 series No n n 1 to 32 i Xe aooo aa ejo i N oa 0 o i 2 ao o SN 2 0 o
56. 1577 AR v LSB gt MSB MSB gt LSB ESE P MSB MSB LSB When processing characters choose 2nd byte Tst byte either option for arranging 1st 2nd 15 0 bytes in one word MSB gt LSB MSB LSB 1st byte 2nd byte Code DEC BCD Choose the code for entering numerical data For some numerical data such as those for data displays or data sampling in the sampling mode this setting is not applied because BCD or DEC should be chosen for Input Format Read Area Write Area Refer to the next section System Memory LJ Read Write Area GD 80 Compatible When converting screen data files created on GD 80 into those of the V7 series this option is automatically checked When this option is checked GD 80 compatibility is supported by securing 2 words each for Read Area and Write Area in the same format as GD 80 For more information refer to the GD 80 User s Manual L Use Ethernet When using Ethernet communications check this option For more information refer to Chapter 4 Network Communications 1 Ethernet 3 6 1 1 1 Connection System Memory Read Area Write Area of the system memory must be secured for communications between the V7 series and the PLC e Setting Position System Setting gt Comm Parameter gt Comm Parameter dialog e Setting Items Read Area 3 words or more This is the area where commands from the PLC are received fo
57. 25 pin male O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 Use shielded twist pair cables 1 MITSUBISHI PLC According to our noise tests the attachment of a ferrite core improves noise voltage by 650 to 900 V and aids in preventing communication errors e When connecting to the A QnA series CPU directly attach a ferrite core to the communication cable between the V7 series and A QnA series CPU to avoid noise problems Ferri OTR COTR rn A QnA series V7 series de CPU e Ferrite cores are optionally available When ordering the ferrite core state GD FC ID 8 mm OD 20 mm e In consideration of such noise problems it is recommended that the standard type link unit be used when the cable length of 15 m or longer is required Wiring Diagram 8 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 1 MITSUBISHI PLC EEB A Link Net10 e When the V7 series is connected to the standard type link unit on the CPU that is connected to the data link system or network system the V7 series can have access to CPUs on NET II B and NET 10 In this case select A Link Net10 for PLC Type on the VSFT editor e When the V7 series has access to the CPU on NET II B or NET 10 With NET II B the V7 series can only have access to CPUs in the network of the CPU equipped with the standard type link unit that is connected to the V7 series Available CPU
58. 5 DO a a pi O Use shielded twist pair cables o Wiring Diagram 2 3 V7 CN1 TU D sub 25 pin male D PLC n D sub 15 pin male SD 2 RD 4 SG 7 RTS 8 CTS 12 Use shielded twist pair cables 3 SHARP PLC RS 422 Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 15 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Wiring Diagram 5 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC FG Ao is o A 7 D sub 15 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 4 HITACHIPLC EEE 4 HITACHI PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection E RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 COMM aR RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 Peripheral port 1 on the CPU module RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 EH150 HITACHI s EH RS05 cable HIDIC H series RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 HIDIC H PERIPHERAL 1 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 On H 252C CPU module PERIPHERAL 2 HITACHI s CNCOM O5cable O RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 10 2a Interface on the CPU unit RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 RS 232C connector on the se ta o RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 HIDIC S 10 20 S10 mini CPU unit Wiring Diag l LQE060 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 3 HIDIC S10 ABS ABS RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 D n 1 When using the HITACHI s EH RS05 or CNCOM 05 cable connect the cable shown in
59. 5 During data transfer the Start switch changes into Busy and flashes When data has been transferred successfully the following window is displayed However when Sys Program or Select All is selected the Main Menu screen is displayed without this message window on completion of data transfer Work normally finished Press the OK switch The Card Menu screen is displayed If any other message is displayed refer to page 2 23 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 2 19 When Display gt Card is Selected 1 When Display gt Card is selected the Card Transfer screen is displayed Flashes during communication with the CF card Indicates the name of the currently selected folder Card Transfer CF Card File Infomation Access DSP0000 BIN 2002 03 20 10 58 56 Indicates the free space in the CF card Sys Program V710 V712 Version 1 010 Font Date ENGLISH Version 1 300 1 010 1 000 I F Driver GENERAL Version 1 240 Screen PLC Type GENERAL Screen Comment Display gt Card Starts transferring data Display gt Card Return Moves back to the previous screen Start POWER Indicates the information of the currently selected folder If there is no screen data this field becomes blank 2 Check the folder name and CF card file information and press the Start switch When
60. 64 status 585 Network table 65 status 586 Network table 66 status 587 Network table 67 status 588 Network table 68 status 589 Network table 69 status 590 Network table 70 status 591 Network table 71 status 592 Network table 72 status Z o 2 Q x O o 3 3 Cc gt O a 5 n 1 Ethernet Address Contents s593 Network table 73 status 594 Network table 74 status 595 Network table 75 status 596 Network table 76 status 597 Network table 77 status 598 Network table 78 status 599 Network table 79 status 600 Network table 80 status 601 Network table 81 status 602 Network table 82 status 603 Network table 83 status 604 Network table 84 status 605 Network table 85 status 606 Network table 86 status 607 Network table 87 status 608 Network table 88 status 609 Network table 89 status 610 Network table 90 status 611 Network table 91 status 612 Network table 92 status 613 Network table 93 status 614 Network table 94 status 615 Network table 95 status 616 Network table 96 status 617 Network table 97 status 618 Network table 98 status 619 Network table 99 status 1 Ethernet 4 25 Addresses e s514 515 These addresses are related to macro commands SEND EREAD and EWRITE s514 Sets the executing status of the macro In the case of 0 the next step of the macro is executed without waiting
61. Communication Refer to modular Maker MITSUBISHI Qn series ink Baud Rate 192008PS 7 Parity Even x 3 Select the MJ port Click the Refer to Modular button The Modular Jack dialog is displayed Select 7 Use Temp Control Network PLC2Wey Communication Modular Jack Temp PLC2Way for modular jack 1 or 2 m Tendida ES that is used for PLC2Way communication pada Edtorpon Notused Memory Card Memory Card Barcode Barcode C v0 C v0 C Temp PLC2Way ra PLC2Way Retials C Touch Switch C Touch Switch Time Out Modbus Slave C Modbus Slave ER Send Dele Printer Serial Port C Printer Serial Port Return Tir Cance Default DK Cancel END co 4 Select the PLC model to be connected at Temp Control PLEZWay Comm Settin x the Mu port Click the Setting button F Use Tene e omnes The Type Setting dialog is displayed wae AN Select PLC2Way The PLC manufacturer eel On seis ir names who support PLC2Way SOMA communication are displayed Click E YOKOGAWA The available model names of the selected Banas manufacturer are displayed Select the ee PLC model name and click OK The Send Delay CD message communication Communication Retum Time Cancel a parameters are reset OK is displayed Click Yes ae ee 5 Set the parameters for the PLC to be connected at the MJ port zi IV Use Temp Control Networ
62. Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Parity Even Even a Data length 7 ASCII 7 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Sumcheck Provided fixed Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 Only D register of SELMART is available No other devices can be used Be sure to note the above though the setting on the V SFT editor is possible 16 SHINKOPLC EEE Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a EIB 7 sasuna pic 17 SAMSUNG PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Connection SPC series SPC series RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 RS 422 485 Wiring Diagram 2 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600
63. DeviceType 6 addr 1 BitNo 4 OnFlag 0 OFF 1 ON IpAddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX Z o 2 Q x O o 3 3 Cc gt O a 5 n e Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError 1 Ethernet Write Bits to Internal Memory int HKEtn_WritelnternalBitMemory int DeviceType DWORD addr int BitNo int OnFlag char IpAddr This function is retained until write completion is received from the V7 series It is reset on receipt of write completion to the internal memory e Parameters DeviceType addr BitNo OnFlag IpAddr e Return values Success Failure Error details 0 u 1 s Top memory address to be written Bit number to be accessed 0 OFF 1 ON IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX TRUE FALSE Get using HKEtn_GetLastError Write Bits to Memory Card Memory int HKEtn_WriteCardBitMemory int FileNo int RecordNo DWORD addr int BitNo int OnFlag char IpAddr This function is retained until write completion is received from the V7 series It is reset on receipt of write completion to the memory card memory e Parameters FileNo RecordNo addr BitNo OnFlag IpAdar e Return values Success Failure Error details File number record number Top memory address to be written Bit number to be accessed 0 OFF 1 ON IP address shown as a s
64. ENGLISH Version 1 300 1 010 1 000 VF Driver GENERAL Version 1 240 Screen PLC Type GENERAL Screen Comment Display lt gt Card Start Starts transferring data Display lt gt Cara Moves back to the previous screen Return 8 8 O gd Y B 0 POWER Indicates the information of the currently selected folder If there is no screen data this field becomes blank 2 Press the Start switch 3 During data transfer the Start switch changes into Busy and flashes When data has been transferred successfully the following window is displayed Work normally finished Press the OK switch If any other message is displayed refer to page 2 23 4 Press the Return switch The Card Menu screen is displayed again 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 2 21 3 3 Saving Backup Copies of SRAM In this section the procedure for saving backup copies of the SRAM memory or V7EM S SRAM cassette for battery replacement is explained 1 Press the SRAM switch on the Card Menu screen When the lamp is red it is selected 2 Select Display lt Card Display gt Card or Display lt gt Card Data selection Transfer selection CREC Menu CREC Menu Data Selection Transfer Menu gt Data Selection T
65. JD42 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 H D JD40 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 3 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps fixed Port 0 fixed Parity Even fixed a Data length 8 fixed Transmission code Stop bit 1 fixed Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks D data table 0 X input relay 1 WX as word device Y output relay 2 WY as word device R internal relay 3 WR as word device K keep relay 4 WK as word device T timer 5 Cc counter 6 O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt oO v z O a 20 FANUC PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 1 Half pitch 20 pin RS 422 Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 1 Half pitch 20 pin R 120 Q 1 2 W 20 FANUC PLC 5 115 Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 1 Half pitch 20 pin
66. K Sequence Memory TYPE Remarks R data register 0 l input relay 1 Q output relay 2 M internal relay 3 S stage 4 GI global input 5 GQ global output 6 T timer contact 7 Cc counter contact 8 SR T SR T K Protocol Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 X input relay 1 Common to X Y Y output relay 2 Common to X Y M internal relay 3 S stage 4 K keep relay 5 L link relay 6 T timer contact 7 Cc counter contact 8 Switch Setting U 01DM On line Off line switch UNIT ADR switch SW4 DIP switch 10 KOYO PLC 5 67 On line O for x10 1 for x1 No Setting Contents 1 ON A 3 ON 4 ON With parity 5 OFF Self diagnosis 6 OFF l 7 OFF ruai delay time 8 OFF SW5 DIP switch No Setting Contents 1 OFF Master slave control 2 OFF Slave 3 OFF Communication timeout 4 OFF HEX mode O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 ra v z O a END o kovopic G 01DM On line Off line switch On line Short plug 1 open Short plug 2 RS 232C ENABLE RS 422 DISENABLE SW1 DIP switch No Setting Contents 1 ON 2 OFF 3 OFF 4 OFF Unit No 1 5 OFF 6 OFF 7 OFF 8 OFF 1 N 9 OFF Slave SW2 DIP switch No Setting Contents 1 ON z E 3 ON 4 ON With parity 5 OFF
67. M internal relay 4 S state 5 X input relay 6 Read only Y output relay 7 TS timer contact 8 CS counter contact 9 DX data register 10 2 1 For numerical data format where double words can be used Num Data Display Graph Sampling data is processed as double words For those where bits or words can be used data O is processed as words consisting of lower 16 bits o For input Upper 16 bits are ignored 5 For output 0 is written for upper 16 bits 3 2 Use DX for D1000 to 2999 o 3 FX2N Series 2 O o Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 TN timer current value CN counter current value 2 32CN counter 32 bits 3 1 M internal relay 4 S state 5 X input relay 6 Read only Y output relay 7 TS timer contact 8 CS counter contact 9 1 For numerical data format where double words can be used Num Data Display Graph Sampling data is processed as double words For those where bits or words can be used data is processed as words consisting of lower 16 bits For input Upper 16 bits are ignored For output 0 is written for upper 16 bits 1 MITSUBISHI PLC FX Series A Protocol Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 TN timer current value 1 CN counter current value 2 1 32CN counter 32 bits 3 2 M internal relay 4 S state 5 X input relay 6 Read only Y
68. Manual Operation for HK fonts 4 Specifications 1 13 Function Performance Specifications ltem Specifications Screens Max 1024 Screen Memory Flash memory Appox 4 992 kbyte varies depending on the font Switches 768 per screen Switch Actions Set reset momentary alternate to light Possible to press a function switch and a display switch at the same time Lamps Reverse blink exchange of graphics 768 per screen Graphs Pie bar panel meter and closed area graph No limitation within 256 kbyte per screen Statistics and trend graphs Max 256 per layer Numerical Data Display No limitation within 256 kbyte per screen E Character Display No limitation within 256 kbyte per screen 2 Message Display Resolution 640 x 480 max 80 characters 1 byte w 800 x 600 max 100 characters 1 byte A No limitation within 256 kbyte per screen Sampling Sampling display of buffer data Constant sample bit synchronize bit sample relay sample alarm function Graphic Library Max 1024 Multi Overlaps Max 1024 Data Blocks Max 2560 Messages Max 6144 lines Patterns Max 1024 Macro Blocks Max 1024 Page Blocks Max 1024 Direct Blocks Max 1024 Screen Blocks Max 1024 Data Sheets Max 1024 Screen Library Max 1024 Animation Frames Max 1023 Temperature Control Network Max 32 PLC
69. Network table 19 status 540 Network table 20 status 541 Network table 21 status 542 Network table 22 status 543 Network table 23 status 544 Network table 24 status 545 Network table 25 status 546 Network table 26 status 547 Network table 27 status 548 Network table 28 status 1 Ethernet Address Contents s549 Network table 29 status 550 Network table 30 status 551 Network table 31 status 552 Network table 32 status 553 Network table 33 status 554 Network table 34 status 555 Network table 35 status 556 Network table 36 status 557 Network table 37 status 558 Network table 38 status 559 Network table 39 status 560 Network table 40 status 561 Network table 41 status 562 Network table 42 status 563 Network table 43 status 564 Network table 44 status 565 Network table 45 status 566 Network table 46 status 567 Network table 47 status 568 Network table 48 status 569 Network table 49 status 570 Network table 50 status 571 Network table 51 status 572 Network table 52 status 573 Network table 53 status 574 Network table 54 status 575 Network table 55 status 576 Network table 56 status 577 Network table 57 status 578 Network table 58 status 579 Network table 59 status 580 Network table 60 status 581 Network table 61 status 582 Network table 62 status 583 Network table 63 status 584 Network table
70. No 0 to 30 With NET 10 the V7 series can have access to CPUs in the network No 1 in the illustration below of the CPU equipped with the standard type link unit that is connected to the V7 series as well as those in the other networks Nos 2 and 3 in the illustration below that are connected Available CPU No 1 to 30 Standard type link unit O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a e When the V7 series reads from or writes to the CPU 1 1 in the above illustration equipped with the standard type link unit Set 31 for CPU No for memory setting on the V SFT editor The response time is the same as that with 1 1 connection between the V7 series and the PLC When the V7 series reads from or writes to the CPU memory of the CPU number other than 31 Transient transmission is performed and the response time is not fast Please understand beforehand 1 MITSUBISHI PLC e To have access to the PLC in the other network on NET 10 specify the network number in the OPEN macro for the screen on the V SFT editor This macro command should be OUT_ENQ of system call SYS It is not possible to have access to the CPU on the different network from the same screen e Network specifying macro OUT_ENQ of system call SYS F1 memory n 0 Always 0 n 1 Network selection 2 n 2 System code n 3 Network number n 0 and n 1
71. Port 3 on a CPU unit RS 485 Wiring Diagram 6 Direct LOGIC K Sequence Port 2 on a CPU unit Port 1 on a CPU unit o F D2 240 f RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 Port 2 on a CPU unit Port 1 on a CPU unit D2 250 7 Port 2 on a CPU unit RS 232C Wiring Diagram 3 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 for x10 1 for x1 1 Parity Odd Odd a Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Function Host link system fixed Response delay time 0 fixed Time out None fixed ASCII HEX HEX fixed 29 Automationdirect PLC GEE Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks V data register 0 X input relay 1 Y output relay 2 C internal relay 3 S stage 4 GX global inputs 5 GY global outputs 6 T timer contact 7 CT counter contact 8 Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male
72. Printer Interface for Printer Connection Compliant with Centronics half pitch 36 pin NEC PR201 EPSON ESC P J84 ESC P super function ESC P24 J84 CBM292 293 printer HP PCL Level 3 Barcode printer MR400 CF Card Interface Compliant with CompactFlash 10BASE T for Ethernet Connection Standard with V7i Compliant with IEEE802 3 Baud rate 10 Mbps Cables 100 Q unshielded twist pair Category 5 maximum length 100 m 1 The CBM292 293 printer cannot print screen hard copies Clock and Backup Memory Specifications ltem Specifications Battery Specification Coin type lithium primary cell Battery type Sanyo CR2450 CN21 Backup Memory SRAM 64 kbyte Backup Time Period 5 years ambient temperature at 25 C Battery Voltage Drop Detection Provided internal memory allocated Calendar Accuracy Monthly deviation 90 sec ambient temperature at 25 C IL fe Q w D ie O D Q gt O 0 o n 1 12 4 Specifications Drawing Environment Item Specifications Drawing Method Exclusive drawing software Drawing Tool Name of exclusive drawing software V SFT Ver 2 00 and later Personal computer OS Capacity of hard disk required Display Pentium II 450 MHz or above recommended Windows98 Me NT Ver 4 0 2000 XP Free space of approx 460 Mbyte or more For minimum installatio
73. RS 232C protocol 2 without port RS 422 protocol 2 with port ST No switch 0 for both x10 x1 DIP switch Switch Setting Contents 1 OFF Bit length 2 OFF 3 ON Same as that set on V7 normally 19200 bps 4 ON 5 ON With parity 6 ON Even OFF Stop bit 1 8 ON With sumcheck Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a HIDIC H Memory TYPE Remarks WR internal word output 0 X external bit input 1 WX as word device Y external bit output 2 WY as word device L bit CPU link area 3 WL as word device M bit data area 4 WM as word device TC timer counter elapsed time 5 R relay 6 TD timer counter contact T WN network input output 8 EED micro HIDIC S 10 20 Memory TYPE Remarks FW work register 0 X input relay 1 XW as word device Y output relay 2 YW as word device R internal relay 3 RW as word device G global link 4 GW as word device K keep relay 5 KW as word device T on delay timer contact 6 TW as word device U one shot timer contact 7 UW as word device Cc up down counter contact 8 CW as word device TS
74. SANYO facing towards the printed circuit io board and the cable hanging down and insert the battery Y Socket into the socket Insert the battery in the a side first and a side push it down to a while inserted in the b side Printed circuit board 5 Plug the battery connector and close the battery holder cover Battery connector 6 Remove the existing caution sticker Enter a date five years from now for Battery Replacement on the new caution sticker and attach it to the backside of the V7 unit 7 When a RAM file is saved in step 1 turn the V7 unit on and load the RAM file to the unit ED 10 DIP Switch setting 10 DIP Switch Setting DIP Switch DIPSW Setting Set the terminating resistance for RS 422 485 connection with the DIP switch When setting the DIP switch turn the power off For V708 V708i For V710 V710i V712 V712i Side View Rear View DIP switch JH MJ2 modular jack 2 terminating resistance CF auto load d sd CN1 RD terminating resistance at pins 24 and 25 MJ1 modular jack 1 terminating resistance Set DIPSW2 to 5 not used to the OFF position Terminating Resistance Setting DIPSW6 7 8 e When connecting the PLC at CN1 via RS 422 485 interface set DIPSW7 to the ON position e For t
75. Specifications for Communication Unit PROFIBUS DP E oe Na Connection to PLCs MITSUBISHI PLC OMRON PLC SHARP PLC HITACHI PLC MATSUSHITA PLC YOKOGAWA PLC YASKAWA PLC Toyopuc PLC FUJI PLC 10 KOYO PLC 11 Allen Bradley PLC 12 GE Fanuc PLC 13 TOSHIBA PLC 14 TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 15 SIEMENS PLC 16 SHINKO PLC 17 SAMSUNG PLC 18 KEYENCE PLC 19 LG PLC 20 FANUC PLC FATEK AUTOMATION PLC _ 22 IDEC PLC 23 MODICON PLC 24 YAMATAKE PLC 25 TAIAN PLC 26 SAIA PLC 27 MOELLER PLC 28 Telemecanique PLC 29 Automationdirect PLC Indicates manufacturers who support PLC2Way connection at the MJ port For the applicable PLC models refer to the PLC2Way column in Available PLCs O connectable x not connectable 1 Available PLCs 1 MITSUBISHI PLC MITSUBISHI PLC 5 1 A Series Link QnA Series Link QnH Q Series Link A Link Net10 Select PLC Type CPU Unit Port Connection PLC2Way AJ71C24 S6 A2A A3A AJ71C24 S8 AJ71UC24 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 O A2U A3U A4U AJ71UC24 AJ71C24 A1 A2 A3 AJ71C24 S3 A1N A2N A3N AJ71C24 S6 ASH ASM A73 Ay71024 S8 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 O AJ71UC24 A series link A0J2 A0J2H A0J2C214 S1 A1SJ71UC24 R2 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O A2US A1SJ71UC24 R4 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 O A1SJ71UC24 PRF RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O A1SJ71C24 R2 RS 2
76. T Permissible Momentary Power Within 1 ms Within 20 ms Within 1 ms Within 20 ms Within 1 ms Failure gt a V708C V708S iS S Power Consumption 15Wor 22Wor 60 VA or less 30 W or less 60 VA or less 30 W or less a Maximum Rating less less o 3 For 100 VAC For 100 VAC o 16 A 6 ms 16 A 6 ms Rush Current 25 A 0 7 ms For 200 VAC 30A 1 ms For 200 VAC 30 A 1 ms 32 A 7 ms 32A 7 ms DC external AC external DC external AC external DC external terminals to FG terminals to FG terminals to FG terminals to FG terminals to FG Withstand Voltage 500 vac 1500 VAC 500 VAC 1500 VAC 500 VAC 1 minute 1 minute 1 minute 1 minute 1 minute Insulation Resistance 500 VDC 10 MQ or above Ambient 6 5 Temperature Poise o Storage Ambient E o 2 Temperature i 10 600 lw 5 Ambient Humidity 85 RH or less without dew condensation 8 v Solvent Resistance No cutting oil or organic solvent attached to the unit p a Atmosphere No corrosive gas or conductive dust WO AA Vibration frequency 10 to 150 Hz Acceleration 9 8 m s 1 0G Vi R a 2s lorationi Resistance Single amplitude 0 075 mm X Y Z 3 directions for one hour El 3 2 Shock Resisiante Pulse shape Sine half wave 2 0 Peak acceleration 147 m s 15G X Y Z 3 directions six times each Bo Noise Resistance 1500Vp p pulse width 1 us rising time 1 ns oco 3 53 Static Electricity 6 Discharge Compliant with IEC1000 4 2 contact 6 kV air 8 kV O Resi
77. TYPE Remarks D data register 0 M auxiliary relay 1 P input output relay 2 Input Read only K keep relay 3 TC timer current value 4 CC counter current value 5 TS timer set value 6 CS counter set value 7 19 LG PLC MASTER K500 1000 Memory TYPE Remarks input output relay o Input Read only relay iak link relay keep relay special relay Read only timer current value counter set value oJ oladi 71 Arz data register NO om AJOJN MASTER KxxxS Memory TYPE Remarks input output relay Input Read only auxiliary relay link relay keep relay special relay Read only timer current value counter set value oJ oO Al 7 A r z lt U data register 4 O timer contact o NI OD oa A wo N Q O ma a ee ee ee ee ed ed counter contact e o MASTER KxxxS CNET Memory TYPE Remarks input output relay o PW as word device input read only auxiliary relay MW as word device link relay LW as word device keep relay KW as word device special relay FW as word device read only timer current value counter setting value data register 4 O timer contact OLN OD a A ow mM Q O D O S 7 A CT 0 counter
78. The power source must be within the allowable voltage fluctuation e Use a power source with low noise between the cables or between the ground and the cable e Use as thick a power supply cable as possible to minimize drop in voltage E D o D oO Mm O D Q oh o S n o D 1 22 8 Power Supply Cable Connection e Keep cables of 100 VAC and 24 VDC sufficiently away from high voltage large current carrying cables e Be sure to attach the terminal cover to the terminal block For V708 V708i ForV710 V710i V712 V712i Attach the terminal cover When closing the terminal cover hold supplied to the terminal block one end of the cover as shown below Terminal cover SISI Press either end Notes on Usage of 100 240 VAC Specifications e Generally an isolating transformer improves noise resistance However if the display unit is far away from the secondary port of the transformer and noise gets mixed in an isolating transformer becomes unnecessary e f any power voltage fluctuation caused by noise is expected it is recommended that a voltage stabilizer effective in noise resistance be used P Insulation transformer PWAL or j To V710 V710i V712 V712i supply i Stabilized transformer 1 25 mm Twist the cables Grounding CAUTION Be sure to establish a ground of MONITOUCH The level of grounding resistance should be less than 100 Q upne equipment 2 f O t
79. Turn off the power supply when you set up the unit connect cables or perform maintenance and inspection Failure to do so could cause an electric shock or damage to the unit e Never touch any terminals while the power is on An electric shock may occur e You must put a cover on the terminals on the unit when you turn the power on and operate the unit Without the terminal cover in place an electric shock may occur e The liquid crystal in the LCD panel is a hazardous substance If the LCD panel is damaged never swallow the leaked liquid crystal If the liquid crystal spills on your skin or clothing use soap and wash off thoroughly CAUTION Notes on System Design e Never bundle control cables and input output cables with high voltage and large current carrying cables such as power supply cables Keep these cables at least 200 mm away from the power supply or high voltage cables Otherwise malfunction may occur due to noise e For use in a nuclear energy facility or other facility of such official importance please consult your local distributor Notes on Installation e Operate or store MONITOUCH under the conditions indicated in this manual and related manuals Failure to do so could cause fire malfunction physical damage or deterioration e Understand the following environmental limits for use and storage of MONITOUCH Otherwise fire or damage to the unit may result Avoid locations where there is
80. V712 V712i protective sheet This anti glare sheet protects the operation panel surface 5 sheets set V7 BT battery for replacement Replacement lithium battery for the V7 series V708S FL gt V708S V708iS V6xxx FL xxx 08C gt V708C 10T gt V710T V710iT 10S gt V710S V710iS 12S gt V712S V712iS backlight for replacement Replacement backlight parts for the V7 series 3 System Composition 1 7 3 System Composition System Composition of V7 Standard The following illustration shows possible system configurations using the V7 series standard Vv series During operation Panel Editor Transferring Link communication f sereen data RS 232C RS 422 Creating screens V6 CP gt gt Personal computer PC V7 standard Link unit During operation Transferring screen data Universal lh Transferring recipe data communication Saving sampling data RS 232C RS 422 etc Transferring screen data 3 Transferring other data CF card General purpose computer Transferring screen data v6 CP Memory manager Data logging function CREC cable Card recorder CREC Printer cable Printer Temperature controller Cable inverter V6 BCD Barcode reader E D o D oO Mm O D Q oh o S n o D ED 3 System Composition System Composition of V7i High performance The following illustration shows possible system configurations using the V7i series hi
81. VAC specification Device specification S TFT color LCD SVGA T TFT color LCD VGA C STN color LCD VGA Functional specification i High performance type None Standard type Screen size 08 8 inch 10 10 inch 12 12 inch 2 Models and Peripheral Equipment dE The following models are available Series and Model Size Name Specifications Remarks V708SD TFT color 800 x 600 dots standard DC power supply Compliant with CE UL cUL V708 series V708iSD TFT color 800 x 600 dots high performance DC power Compliant with CE UL cUL 8 inch supply V708CD STN color 640 x 480 dots standard DC power supply Compliant with CE UL cUL V710T TFT color 640 x 480 dots standard AC power supply V710TD TFT color 640 x 480 dots standard DC power supply Compliant with CE UL cUL V710iT TFT color 640 x 480 dots high performance AC power supply V710iTD TFT color 640 x 480 dots high performance DC power Compliant with CE UL cUL V710 series supply 10 inch V710S TFT color 800 x 600 dots standard AC power supply V710SD TFT color 800 x 600 dots standard DC power supply Compliant with CE UL cUL V710iS TFT color 800 x 600 dots high performance AC power supply V710iSD TFT color 800 x 600 dots high performance DC power Compliant with CE UL cUL supply v712S TFT color 800 x 600 dots standard AC power supply V712SD TFT color 800 x 600 dots standard DC
82. When Use Ethernet is selected in the Comm Parameter dialog be sure to edit the network table 1 Ethernet 4 15 Starting and Closing e Starting Select System Setting gt Network Table Setting gt Ethernet The network table edit window is displayed A a Close button File Edit View Help ale alej aee 2 No Host Name 1P Address Send Timeout Internal Memory Write Memory Card Memory 2 Ready Ethernet 4 e Closing z Select File Exit or click the Close button z Menu and Icons S Each menu item corresponds to the icons as shown below 3 e File menu 5 woo glej ole ejej 21 S n Import Network Table Export NetworkTable Update SFT Netwok Table Exit Import Network Table Imports a network table saved as a file ntb Export Network Table Exports a network table as a file ntb e Edit menu 2 8 o o mej Edit View Help Undo Ctrhz Reda Gtr y Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Delete Del Modify Select All Ctri A Use Monitor Registration Cancel Monitor Registration Use Monitor Registration Only one V7 series can be registered as the monitor for Ethernet communications Internal Memory Write PLC 192 168 1 58 15 Enabled Ww 192 168 1 68 15 Enabled PLC 192 168 1 66 15 Enabled A mark is shown on the left of the network table number Cancel Monitor Registration
83. _ 3 number read UMP 0 3 number y Main Sub Latest user Port CPU No 11 Command a Year Month Day Hour Minute Second code code a log read number 0 3 0 as Error 3 1 Error ASCII DEC A Main Sub apihuseriog Port Lepunto 1 camina ral Year Month Day Hour Minute Second code code a read number 0 3 1 to 63 3 1 Error ASCII DEC Return data Data stored from PLC2Way gt V7 series 1 Set O for CPU No 1 2 The registration number is stored in special register Z105 3 If there is no user log in the n 2 memory or there is an error in communications 1 is stored 7 PLC2Way 3 47 Processing Cycle The processing cycle on the V7 series with the PLC2Way function is explained Fig a When the temperature control network PLC2Way table is not used PLC data 1 PLC data n E ete PLC data 1 PLC data 2 _ connected at PLC data 3 connected at PLC data n _____ the MJ port the MJ port lt 1 cycle gt Fig b When the temperature control network PLC2Way table is used 2 v o o 9 3 3 1 screen data read cycle A O PLC data 1 PLC data 2 PLC data n EEE connected at jH connected at 2 connected at Mm the MJ port the MJ port the MJ port 2 gt 1 data read cycle from the PLC connected at the MJ port When the temperature control network PLC2Way table is not used Fig a PLC da
84. administrator of 351 IC receive buffer overflow your company The communication unit is in the older 352 Driver receive buffer overflow version or is faulty Check the HUB or the link confirmation LED on the 801 Receive processing error link down error communication unit If the LED is not on check cable connection and the port setting on the network table 802 Transceiver error Check the transceiver and cable connection 900 No IP address at local port Check that the IP address of the local port is set on the network table Check if the same IP address is set 901 Duplicated IP address error on the network 902 Send socket ID error error that may Turn the power off and back it on If the problem occur when V7i LAN port is used persists contact your local distributor 1000 Ethernet I F unit not mounted 1001 Ethernet I F unit not ready 1002 Ethernet I F unit DPRAM error 1003 No response from Ethernet I F unit 1004 Ethernet receive buffer over 1005 Ethernet send registration error Check whether the Ethernet I F unit is mounted correctly and then turn the power off and on If the 1006 I F unit unregistered interrupt problem persists contact your local distributor 1100 1115 Initialization error communication unit 1120 Dual port access error 1200 Undefined register 1201 Send receive buffer area over 1202 MAC address error 1203 Port error Check whether the Ethernet I F unit is mounted 1301 Watch dog overflow correctly and then turn
85. and enables direct reading from link devices LB LW LX or LY Also it is possible to directly write data to link devices that are assigned by the control station Example When LW is assigned by the control station as shown Control station 1Mp1 Normal station 1Ns2 below 0 FF 1Mp1 100 1FF 1Ns2 200 2FF 1Ns3 300 3FF 1Ns4 ig ink device 0 1FFF Reading LW Writing 1Mp1 oo o 1Mp1 GA E if e i i FF FF _ i 1Ns2 100 1007 1Ns2 Normal station 1Ns4 Normal station 1Ns3 q ye 1FF 1FF _ 1Ns3 200 200 1Ns3 P EER poes Eps I onl IO 2FF 2FF _ 1Ns4 300 300 1 1Ns4 Possible to read SFF 3FF Possible to write to from any area the assigned areas e Transient transmission is also supported It is possible to access to memory addresses such as D or M that are usable with the ordinary 1 1 communications All the memory areas in the PLCs on NET 10 can be accessed Station that sends a request Network No 1 Station that sends a request Note Transient transmission is slower than cyclic transmission 2 or
86. are fixed to 0 and 2 respectively n 2 system code should be 1 NET 10 2 NET II B For n 3 network number set 0 when NET II B is selected for n 2 system code or the network number to be accessed when NET 10 is selected Do not use this macro for any purpose other than OPEN macro for a screen Doing so triggers network switching at the time of macro execution resulting in a communication error For more information on the macro function refer to the Reference Manual Function Also refer to the explanation on network registration contained in the operation manual for MITSUBISHI s Standard Link Multi drop Link Unit e For the NET II B data link system and NET 10 network system refer to MITSUBISHI s manual Available Memory For the available memory of the PLC to be accessed refer to Available Memory page 5 8 Note that the CPU number must be set on the V SFT editor Wiring Refer to the wiring diagram with the standard type link unit 1 MITSUBISHI PLC V MDD Dual Port Interface V MDD is the add on connector with two ports specifically designed for the connector on MITSUBISHI s A series QnA series or FX series CPU programmer MITSUBISHI A QnA FX series When connecting to the CPU of MITSUBISHI A QnA series Insert the connector on the backside into the CPU port directly or use the MDD CPU optional cable for connection eee When connectin
87. bps 9600 bps Parity Not provided Not provided Stop bit 1 1 Terminating resistance ON for RS 485 Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks R input output 0 L link relay 1 M internal relay 2 K keep relay 3 F special relay 4 WwW data register 5 17 SAMSUNG PLC QD Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin male TXD 2 RXD 3 GND 5 O Use shielded twist pair cables a 3 2 S RS 422 2 o Wiring Diagram 2 2 O V7 CN1 n D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin male TR 6 TR 7 Use shielded twist pair cables 18 KEYENCE PLC 18 KEYENCE PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection KZ series link KZ300 KZ350 KZ L2 Port 1 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 Port 2 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 6 KZ A500 CPU Mistubishi A series link KZ A500 CPU modular port RS 232C RS 422 KEYENCE s cable KZ C20 Hakko Electronics cable MB CPUQ Wiring Diagram 3 KZ L10 Port 1 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 4 Port 2 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2
88. can be given L HDCOPY HDxxxx JPG D HDxxxx BIN 2 These folders are automatically created when access folders are created The E BITMAP BMPxxxx BIN folder name cannot be changed JPEG XXxx JPG 3 The folder name for screen data auto JPxxxx JPG uploading cannot be changed H SNAP VDxxxx JPG H WAV WAxxxx WAV H FONT Xxxx FTD XXXXXXXX SHT WEBSERV XXXXXXXX HTML XXXXXXXX TXT 3 DSPDEF 7 DSP DSPDEF BIN L Same as access folders DAT0000 access folder Folder Name Contents Folder Name Contents BITMAP Saves pattern data bitmap data to RECIPE Reads and writes recipe data reduce the screen data capacity CARD Write recipe data from the V7 series SAMPLE Saves history data of the data logging using the V6 compatible memory function manager function DSP Reads and writes screen data SNAP Saves video snap images FONT Saves Gothic fonts or language data SRAM Saves backup data of SRAM to reduce the screen data capacity HDCOPY Writes hard copy images in the JPEG WAV Saves WAV files for sound output to file format from the V7 series for reduce the screen data capacity V708C BIN file JPEG Saves JPEG files for display on the WEBSERV Saves files to be accessed from the screen except for V708C Web browser MEMO Saves memo pad data drawn with the V7 series DSPDEF screen data auto upload folder Folder Name Contents DSP Automatica
89. controller PLC2Way Station No 07 status 738 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 08 status 739 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 09 status 740 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 10 status 741 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 11 status 742 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 12 status 743 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 13 status 744 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 14 status 745 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 15 status 746 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 16 status 747 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 17 status 748 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 18 status 749 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 19 status 750 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 20 status 751 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 21 status 752 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 22 status 753 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 23 status 754 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 24 status 755 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 25 status 756 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 26 status 757 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 27 status 758 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 28 status 759 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 29 status 760 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 30 status 761 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 31 status 762 Other than 0 periodical reading suspended 763 Other t
90. data read from the PLC is temporarily prohibited An inquiry for restoration is sent each time the specified return time has elapsed The following options may be set depending on the PLC model MITSUBISHI A series Link Trans Mode Trans Mode 1 Trans Mode 4 Trans Mode 1 Without CR LF Trans Mode 4 With CR LF OMRON SYSMAC C SYSMAC CV SYSMAC CS1 Trans Mode Trans Mode 1 Trans Mode 2 Trans Mode 1 Standard BCD without signs Trans Mode 2 Special BCD BCD with sign YOKOGAWA FA M3 FAM3R Trans Mode with sum check without sum check 6 To reset the setting click the Default button or set the desired value Code and Text Processing For the PLC connected at the MJ port Code and Text Processing cannot be set in the Temp Control PLC2Way Comm Setting dialog e Code numerical data input format The code is fixed as shown below For some numerical data such as those for data displays or data sampling in the sampling mode BCD or DEC should be chosen for Input Format Manufacturer Model Code Text Processing A series link MITSUBISHI QnA series link DEC QnH Q series link SYSMAC C OMRON SYSMAC CV BCD SYSMAC CS1 JW series LSB gt MSB SHARP JW100 70H COM Port BCD JW20 COM Port YOKOGAWA oe DEC FA M3R MICREX F series BCD FUJI ELECTRIC FLEX PC series DEC e Text Processing When processing characters choose D
91. e OPCN 1 3 Errors Displayed on the V7 Series Error Message Contents Solution I F Board Err The I F unit for OPCN 1 has an error Contact your local distributor Stat No out of range The port number set by a switch is not within the setting range 1 to 127 Specify the port number within the setting range Network Link Error Cannot connect to the master station in the network Check the condition of the master station PLC Check the network connection Network I O Access Err MONITOUCH is about to access exceeding the set number of input output words Check the memory for the network I O in the screen data file Waiting for Reply 1 Less than Max_int time communication monitoring time for salve station set on the PLC for OPCN 1 communications 2 Timeout on the V SFT editor The timeout time can be set from System Setting gt Comm Parameter on the V SFT editor This error is indicated when the above 1 and 2 are present When the Max_int time is too long infinite for example on the PLC it is not possible to know whether or not the response from the PLC is correctly made This error message disappears when a response from the PLC is received within the Max_int time Word Writing to Sp Relay MITSUBISHI A Series Word writing to a special relay M9000 and later is attempted Notes Only bit writing is possible for special rela
92. for the address addr Q Example D400 gt 399 D25 gt 24 IpAddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots 2 Example 192 168 XXX XXX DFlag 0 1 2 Refer to the table below e Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError e Priority and communication procedure depending on the DFlag setting are shown below DFlag Priority Communication Procedure 0 Communications PC v7 PLC Read write request Memory cald Response Acknowledge of completion 1 Display Response a PC V7 PLC 2 Display Read write request Memory gard Acknowledge of completion 1 Ethernet Read Double words from PLC Memory int HKEtn_ReadPlcMemory2 DWORD dp unsigned short Wordcnt int DeviceType DWORD addr char IpAddr int DFlag 1 This function is retained until PLC data is transferred from the V7 series e Parameters dp Target pointer of the data to be read Contents Word Count No 1 2 No 2 2 No n 2 Wordcnt Word count to be read max 1000 words DeviceType Address of the device to be read Refer to Chapter 5 Connection to PLCs addr Top memory address to be read For YOKOGAWA or YASKAWA PLCs specify a number 1 for the address addr Example D400 gt 399 D25 24 IpAddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated
93. for the completion of the command when a command request is given to the Ethernet In the case of other than 0 the wait status continues until the command completes and then the next step of the macro is executed s515 Stores the result of macro execution An error occurs if a value other than 0 is stored For more information refer to the error codes page 4 47 However when s514 is 0 the data before the command request is stored e 3518 Stores the current status of the Ethernet An error occurs if a value other than 0 is stored For more information refer to the error codes page 4 46 e s520 to 619 Stores the statuses of network table No 0 to 99 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Network table use status Macro command execution Not used status L Command execution status Z o 2 Q x O o 3 3 Cc gt O a 5 n Command execution result Bit O Network table use status 0 Not used 1 Used For the current station 0 not used is input Bit 1 Macro command execution status Stores the execution status of macro command SEND EREAD or EWRITE 0 Waiting 1 Executing Bit 2 Command execution status Stores the execution status of the command from the server or other station 0 Waiting 1 Executing read write command Bit 3 Macro command executio
94. function Use 6 YOKOGAWA PLC 5 47 Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs FA500 Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 B common register 1 TP timer current value 2 TS timer set value 3 CP counter current value 4 CS counter set value 5 X input relay 6 o Y output relay 7 a l internal relay 8 2 E external relay 9 rai 3 U FA M3 FA M3R QO Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 R common register 1 V index register 2 W link register 3 Z special register 4 TP down timer current value 5 TS timer set value 6 Read only CP down counter current value 7 CS down counter set value 8 input relay 9 Y output relay 10 l internal relay 11 E common relay 12 L link relay 13 M special relay 14 B file register 15 The CPU number is required in addition to the memory Example 1 D00001 type and address The assigned memory is indicated t when editing the screen as shown on the right Address Memory type CPU number END e YOKOGAWA PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male
95. function switch corresponds to the menu item displayed in the switch menu When the SYSTEM switch is pressed again the switch menu disappears and the function switches F1 to F7 work as defined by the user User defined function switches Function switches for switch menu selection User defined function switches E le e gt 3 O SYSTEM 2 Es e Es g For V710T V710iT V710S V710iS V710iS V712S and V712T For V708S V708iS For V708C 1 ence K A Ps Emo ice Gace 2 Function Switches User defined Function Switches F1 to F7 e User defined function switches F1 to F7 do not work in the STOP mode e When the V7 series is in the RUN mode and the switch menu by the SYSTEM switch is not displayed the function switches can be defined by the user e User defined function switches should be set in the following dialogs of the V SFT editor Settings for each screen Edit gt Local Function Switch Setting gt Function Switch Setting dialog Setting for all screens System Setting gt Function Switch Setting gt Function Switch Setting dialog F1 to F5 Switch Functions with Switch Menu Functions Contents F1 Mode Selects the operation mode between STOP lt RUN Contrast Adjustment Brightness Adjustment Item Adjust me contrast Holding d
96. go to Comm Parameter bring up the Detail tab window and set Continue for Comm Error Handling a screen like the one shown below is displayed Communication Error Time Out Communication Error AAA O O Error Message Contents Solution Remarks Time Out Although a request to send is given 1 Check the communication parameters 1 to the PLC no answer is returned 2 Check the cables and wiring within the specified time 3 Data may be disrupted because of noise 2 Fix noise Parity An error occurred in parity check 1 Check the cables and wiring 1 2 Data may be disrupted because of noise 2 Fix noise Framing Although the stop bit must be 1 it 1 Check the communication parameters 1 is detected as 0 2 Check the cables and wiring 3 Data may be disrupted because of noise 2 Fix noise Overrun After one character is received the 1 Check the communication parameters next character is received before 2 Data may be disrupted because of noise 2 internal processing is completed Fix noise Check Code The check code in the PLC 1 Check the communication parameters 1 response was not correct 2 Data may be disrupted because of noise 2 Fix noise If the above error messages are displayed on the V7 series without establishing communication between V7 and PLC test the solution of remark 1 If the error occurs sud
97. ias PEG PLC Unit Port Connection PLC2Way ype CPU unit with built in RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 O port pet ee host link port RS 422 Wiring Diagram 6 x CV500 CV1000 RS 2320 dc ro PORT Wiring Diagram 3 O CV500 LK201 PORT2 Wiring Diagram 2 O RS 422 PORT2 Wiring Diagram 5 x CPU unit RS 232C port CS1W SCU21 SYSMAC CS1 Mounted on the CPU RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 O SYSMAC CS1 CS1 slot DNA CS1W SCB21 Mounted on the CPU slot E P CS1W SCB41 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 7 x ip Replace the shell on the D sub 25 pin side before use Recommended part DDK s 17J 25 For SYSMAC CS1 DNA refer to page 5 29 O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 EZB 2 0ouroweic Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even o Data length 7 ASCII 7 Transmission code Stop bit 2 2 Command level 3 fixed Protocol 1 n protocol fixed Synchronizing switch Internal synchronization fixed CTS switch 0 V always ON fixed 5 V supply switch OFF fixed Terminating resistance ON for RS 422 The maximum baud rate available with the V7 series is 115200 bps Select the appropriate baud rate depending on the used PLC and environment V SFT Setting Set
98. increase the number of unit nodes use repeaters V7 T type connector i Terminator Maximum segments 5 Maximum network distance 925 m UN T O Maximum network nodes 100 sets ransociver Z o 1 The unit may have a built in transceiver Refer to the instruction manual for the unit O 2 12 V power supply is required for each transceiver O Use the transceiver equipped with the SQE TEST function SQE TEST Signal Quality S Error Test 3 a y Recommended transceiver 3 seb Manufacturer Type o Allied Telesis CentreCOM 107 o The I F unit may be broken if the AUI connector is subject to strong force Use the AUI cable when connecting the transceiver When the power lamp of the transceiver is not turned on check the wiring of 12 VDC power supply then replace the fuse refer to page 4 4 of the I F unit CU 03 For the replacement procedure refer to the manual CU 03 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS attached to CU 03 END 1 Ethernet Transferring Screen Data This section describes the procedure for transferring screen data from the V SFT editor on the server to MONITOUCH via Ethernet For the procedure using the V6 CP cable refer to the Reference Manual Operation Prerequisites When screen data is to be transferred for the first time via Ethernet or when the V7 series has been replaced due to trouble the server cannot transfer screen data because the network table has not been transferre
99. link unit F3LC01 1N is used the communication setting and available memory are the same as those for FA 500 However B common register cannot be used O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a END lt YOKOGAWA PLC Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows FA500 Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 1 1 Parity Even Even Data length 7 7 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Sumcheck Provided fixed Terminal character None fixed Protection function None fixed FA M3 FA M3R Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 1 1 Parity Even Even e Data length 7 7 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Sumcheck Provided Provided Terminal character None fixed Protection function None fixed 1 The maximum baud rate available with the V7 series is 115200 bps Select the appropriate baud rate depending on the used PLC and environment 2 When directing connecting to the programming tool port on the CPU module the data length is fixed to 8 Select 8 bit for Data Length in the comm Parameter dialog of the V7 series Also set CPU Communication Port of Configuration in the ladder creation tool as below Personal computer link
100. output relay 7 TS timer contact 8 CS counter contact 9 1 CN200 to CN255 equals 32CN 32 bit counter 2 For numerical data format where double words can be used Num Data Display Graph Sampling data is processed as double words For those where bits or words can be used data is processed as words consisting of lower 16 bits For input Upper 16 bits are ignored For output 0 is written for upper 16 bits 1 MITSUBISHI PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC S D sub 9 pin male Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a PLC A 7 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 1 MITSUBISHI PLC Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin female Mp es tie ete Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC A O e D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 1 MITSUBISHIPLC SE Wiring Diagram 6 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC te pS HSH D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 7 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub
101. pointer Contents Word Count No 1 2 No 2 2 No n 2 Word count to be transferred max 1000 words Address of the device to be written Refer to Connection to PLCs Top memory address to be written For YOKOGAWA or YASKAWA PLCs specify a number 1 for the address addr Example D400 gt 399 D25 24 IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX 0 1 2 Refer to page 4 29 TRUE FALSE Get using HKEtn_GetLastError 1 Ethernet Write Words to Internal Memory int HKEtn_WritelnternalMemory WORD sp unsigned short Wordcnt int DeviceType DWORD addr chr IpAddr int DFlag 1 This function is retained until write completion is received from the V7 series It is reset on receipt of write completion to the internal memory e Parameters sp Target block pointer Contents Word Count No 1 1 No 2 1 No n 1 Wordcnt Word count to be transferred max 2000 words DeviceType O u 1 s addr Top memory address to be written lpAddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX DFlag 0 1 2 Refer to page 4 29 e Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError Z o 2 Q x O o 3 3 Cc gt O a 5 n 1 Ethernet Write Words to Memory Card Memory int HKEtn_WriteCardMemory WORD sp unsigned short W
102. screen data between the CF card and the V7 series See page 2 11 I O Test Checks the V7 interfaces and performs a touch switch test See page 2 4 O Z 4 O Cc O I O O e gt Mm 24 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 2 1 O Test When the I O Test switch on the Main Menu screen is pressed the following I O Test screen appears This screen is used to check that there is no problem with the V7 interfaces and touch switch operation Moves back to the Main Menu screen Performs a printer interface check See page 2 2 See page 2 8 Moves to the Touch Switch screen See page 2 9 Main Menu sys 1 Mier Ext 1 O Check Printer Check Switch Check F 2 Ire a BAE ET EIN E AEA 2 F 3 FS 1 H Self Loop Test MES l Please refer to the manual Hardware Specifications i F 4 FS i Communication Port i Nye FS BIS CN1 Rs2320 i i MJ1 RS485 Ad E 1 Self Loop Test i i p MJ2 A a Performs a CN1 MJ1 MJ2 interface check Performs a function switch test See page 2 5 See page 2 8 1 When the serial extension I O V I O is connected use this button to check that the V I O works correctly The Ext I O Check switch appears only when V I O is
103. selected for a modular jack on the V SFT editor 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu ED 2 1 Self loop Test This is a signal test for communications through the CN1 MJ1 or MJ2 connector Perform this test if the communication is not successful when transferring screen data through MJ1 connecting the PLC using CN1 or selecting multi link 2 temperature controller PLC2Way or PLC for MJ1 2 or connecting the card recorder or serial extension I O CN1 RS 232C Signal Test Turn the CN1 and RS232C switches on Communication Port CN1 RS232C MJ1 RS485 e SD RD Test Check the signals SD and RD 1 Install a jumper between pins 2 and 3 of CN1 on the backside of the V7 unit 2 Press the Self Loop Test switch When the OK lamp lights up the test is successfully completed CTS Self Loop Test If the NG lamp lights up consult your local distributor e CTS RTS Test Check the signals CTS and RTS 1 Install a jumper between pins 4 RTS and 5 CTS of CN1 on the backside of the V7 unit 2 Press the RTS switch and check that both RTS and CTS lamps light up at the same time Press the RTS switch again and check that both RTS and CTS lamps go off at the same time
104. switches Example To set port No 1 ADR LOW HI Make sure that each I F unit on the network has a unique port number 3 Fuse This is the fuse for 12 VDC power supply Rating 2A 4 10BASE T connector This connector is used for 1OBASE T connection Compliant with IEEE802 3 5 AUI connector This connector is used for connecting the transceiver cable in the case of 10BASE2 or 10BASE5 6 12 VDC power supply terminal The power source is required for the transceiver of AUI connection Be sure to take account of a voltage drop at CU 03 max 0 7 V It is not necessary to use 10BASE T 1 Ethernet ZH Wiring 10BASE T Connection e Cable connection diagram UTP cable UTP cae Straight or cross cable Straight For more information refer the HUB specifications Eth t Z pig e amp O A Distance between the node and the HUB 100 m maximum Node O Maximum network nodes 100 sets 3 3 Z 2 Straight cable with HUB Cross cable without HUB 8 lt O 10BASE T 10BASE T 10BASE T 10BASE T T RJ 45 8Pin RJ 45 8Pin RJ 45 8Pin RJ 45 8Pin Unshielded twist pair cable Unshielded twist pair cable e Notes on cables Use the following recommended cable Recommended cable 10BASE T Type Twist pair cable category 5 WED tt Ethernet AUI Connection e 10BASE5 The following devices are required for 1OBASE5 connection Coaxial cable for 10BASE5 AUI cable N type connector N type terminato
105. the Comm Parameter dialog of the V SFT editor Item MPI SETTING Node Cnt 15 31 63 126 Source No V7 port number 0 Set different numbers for Source No and Local No and make sure that Source No lt Node Cnt Node Cnt is equivalent to Local No of the PLC For example if Local No is 13 Node Cnt is 15 ED 5 SIEMENS PLC TI500 505 T1500 505 V4 Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Parity None fixed 0 Data length 8 fixed Transmission code Stop bit 1 fixed Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs S5 S5 V4 S7 Memory TYPE Remarks DB data register 0 Use memory address DB1 and later for S7 or DB3 or later for S5 l input relay 1 IW as word device read only output relay QW as word device read only F flag internal relay FW as word device read only only in S5 series M flag internal relay 3 MW as word device read only only in S7 series T timer current value Read only Cc counter current value Read only AS absolute address Unavailable with the S7 series 1 The assigned memory is indicated when editing the Example DB003 000 screen as show
106. the power off and on If the 1302 JAVA error LANC error problem persists contact your local distributor 1 Ethernet 4 47 Errors during Macro Command Execution The execution result of macro commands SEND EREAD EWRITE is stored in system memory address s515 e System memory address s515 response to the request Code Contents Solution 0 Normal 200 2000 Communication error Refer to Communication Errors 30 Timeout Check if an error is occurring to the target V7 31 The number of words being sent exceeds Check the number of words that can be sent in macro the limit editing 32 Specified table not used Check the setting on the network table 33 Cannot use the send command Check the macro command in macro editing 34 Specified table being used Check that system memory address s514 is set If not reduce the frequency of communications 35 Cannot process due to short memory Check the memory space at the target station 36 Illegal receive packet bytes Check the requested number of words 37 Memory access error Check the setting of the requested memory 38 Macro setting error Check the macro setting Z o 2 Q x O o 3 3 Cc gt O a 5 n 4 48 2 FL net OPCN 2 2 FL net OPCN 2 FL net OPCN 2 e FL net OPCN 2 is an open FA network that FA Open Systems Promotion Forum JOP of the Manufacturing Science and Technology Cent
107. to be read lpAddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX e Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError Z o 2 Q x O o 3 3 Cc gt O a 5 n 1 Ethernet Read Bits from Memory Card Memory int HKEtn_ReadCardBitMemory int IpOnFlag int FileNo int RecordNo DWORD addr int BitNo char IpAddr This function is retain e Parameters IpOnFlag FileNo RecordNo addr BitNo IpAdar e Return values Success Failure Error details ed until data is transferred from the V7 series Returns the bit status 0 OFF 1 ON File number Record number Top memory address to be read Bit number to be read IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX TRUE FALSE Get using HKEtn_GetLastError Read Words Blocks from PLC Memory int HKEtn_ReadBlockMemory WORD sp BYTE pReadblockData int BlockCnt char IpAddr This function is retain e Parameters sp pReadblockData BlockCnt IpAddr e Return values Success Failure Error details ed until data is transferred from the V7 series Returns the read data Top pointer of the read data Word Count 2 bytes Source PLC memory 9 bytes Block count to be read IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX TRUE FALSE Get using HKEtn_GetLastError
108. to transfer screen data between the V7 series and a CF card or a memory card Moves back to the Main Menu screen or the initial screen Card M a Return Ft 1 CREC Menu F2 FS Data Selection Transfer Menu 2 2 Screen Data Display lt Card 3 SRAM Display gt Card D Display lt gt Card 1 CREC Menu switch Press this switch when connecting the card recorder to the MJ port of the V7 series and transferring screen data between the V7 series and a memory card 2 Screen Data switch Press this switch when transferring screen data between the V7 series and a CF card 3 SRAM switch Press this switch when saving backup copies of the SRAM memory or V7EM S SRAM cassette or when uploading the backup data from the CF card to the V7 series O Z 4 O E O I O O g gt 0 2 12 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 3 1 CREC Menu Screen When the CREC Menu switch on the Card Menu screen is pressed the following CREC Menu screen appears This screen is used to transfer screen data between the V7 series and a memory card The procedure for transferring data is described below CREC Menu Modular Jack MJ1 Transfer Display lt Card Display gt Card Display lt gt Card Data Selection Screen Data Font Data Start I F D
109. with the baud rate setting on the PLC programming software The baud rate set on the PLC programming software is automatically selected when communications monitoring etc are performed When the V7 series is turned off and back on the setting for Baud Rate in the Comm Parameter dialog becomes valid again Transferring the ladder communication program When transferring screen data the ladder communication program is also transferred To transfer the ladder communication program only follow the procedure described below 1 Select Ladder com prg in the Transfer dialog and click PC gt 2 The dialog shown on the right is Joen ii zx displayed Select MelQHCpQ Icm and bnar e Ee click Open The program is megep transferred to the V7 series File name Files of type Icm X Cancel A A Notes on Ladder Transfer Function 1 When Ladder Tool is selected for a modular jack monitor registration on the PLC is prohibited so that the screen display speed becomes slower than usual during communications between the V7 series and the PLC even if the PLC programming software is not started Also when the ladder program is transferred in the RUN mode of the V7 series communications are synchronized therefore the performance of both the V7 series and the PLC programming software decreases O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a 2 2 OMRON PLC OMRON PLC Available PLCs
110. 002 4 1 21 52 36 System Information FONT UF DRV VER 1 250 VER 1 300 1 000 1 000 c ENGLISH SYETEMPROG VER 1000 MELSEC QnH Q Screen Data Inermat n PLO Type MITSUBISHI QnH 0 series CPU Size 5111808 000600600 PORT 1 MAC Warning message 3 Errors Displayed on the V7 Series 2 37 4 SYSTEM ERROR When a system error is detected the following error screen is displayed 20 El SYSTEM ERROR 32 R9 XXXXXXXX R10 XXXXXXXX R13 XXXXXXXX R14 XXXXXXXX O Z 4 O E O I O O D g gt 0 A eG POWER ERROR XX 1 Watch dock timer error 11 Switch table error 30 Request for displaying full error 31 Memory allocation system error 32 General exceptions MMU address system error 33 RTOS system error 34 Memory error 35 Inaccurate memory error The source of the error could be one of the following three problems Contact your local distributor 1 Program crash due to noise 2 Hardware problem 3 Bad program 5 Touch Switch is Active If the power is turned off while a touch switch is activated the following error screen is displayed Remove your finger from the screen Touch Switch is active Keep hand off the screen 2 38 3 Errors Displayed on the V7 Series Please use this page freely
111. 10000 and IP address 192 168 1 52 are set When changing the copy target the port number or the IP address change the setting in the program accordingly 1 Ethernet 4 27 e Notes on use of the sample programs The data type to be set when creating a program varies depending on whether Visual C or Visual Basic is used For the data type and range refer to the following tables Visual C VB BYTE Byte short unsigned short Integer WORD int long Long DWORD char String Visual C a Data Type Bytes Data Range 5 BYTE 1 0 to 255 5 short 2 32768 to 32767 S unsigned short 2 0 to 65535 3 int 4 2147483648 to 2147483647 gt long 4 2147483648 to 2147483647 a WORD 2 0 to 65535 a DWORD 4 0 to 4294967295 char 1 128 to 127 Visual Basic Data Type Bytes Data Range Byte 1 0 to 255 Boolean 2 TRUE 0 FALSE 1 Integer 2 32768 to 32767 Long 4 2147483648 to 2147483647 Double 8 4 94E 324 to 1 79E 308 String Variable 0to2GB 1 Eth ernet Function Specifications List e Read PLC memory int HKEtn_ReadPlcMemory WORD dp unsigned short Wordent int Page 4 29 Word DeviceType DWORD addr char IpAdar int DFlag 1 9 PLC memory int HKEtn_ReadPlcMemory2 DWORD dp unsigned short Wordcnt int Page 4 30 Double word DeviceType DWORD addr char IpAdar i
112. 15 D either option for arranging 1st 2nd bytes 1 LSB gt MSB MSB Ls ite in one word As shown on the right itis a 7 send byt 2S Oe fixed to LSB gt MSB ep oO D O 3 3 a 5 O je Oo n ED pco Setting the PLC Memory Connected at the MJ Port 1 Open the Memory Input dialog for the part where the PLC memory connected at the MJ port should be allocated Memory Input PLC2 Memory MITSUBISHI QnA Se Type PLC Memory D z 00100 Internal Mem lt EF santo Ff lalaje 2 For the PLC memory connected at the MJ port select PLC2 Memory for Type and specify the memory address 3 Set the port number of the PLC V SFT Setting When the temperature control network PLC2Way table is used The following operations are available when the temperature control network PLC2Way table is used 1 Constant read from the PLC memory When the temperature control network PLC2Way table is set the data read from the PLC2 memory can be stored in the PLC memory or the V7 internal memory at regular intervals 2 Data Sampling from the PLC Memory Connected at the MJ Port It is possible to link the temperature control network PLC2Way table with the buffering area and perform sampling of data in the PLC memory that is connected at the MJ port 3 Data transfer from the PLC2 memory Data in the PLC2 memory can be transferred to the PLC memory V7 internal memory or a memo
113. 2 communications and Ethernet communications at the same time e When transferring screen data use the 10BASE T connector on the communication interface unit CU 03 Be sure to set the IP address etc on the Main Menu and Ethernet screens For the setting procedure refer to Chapter 2 MONITOUCH Operations For data transfer refer to page 4 9 3 MELSECNET 10 MEU 3 MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET 10 e MELSECNET 10 is the network system that is developed by MITSUBISHI Electric Corporation When the V7 series is equipped with the communication interface unit CU 05 is mounted it can work as a NET 10 station a sub control station Control station 1Mp1 Normal station 1Ns2 pa Z 2 Q O o 3 3 Z gt O a 5 D Normal station 1Ns4 Normal station 1Ns3 e For communications with the PLC no program is required in the same way as communications via a link unit e The V7 series supports the optical loop system of NET 10 Use fiber optic cables for connection Fiber optic cable C Optical loop system GE WELSECNET 10 e This network system supports cyclic transmission
114. 2 18 1 Bytes Response Normal communication S V7 A E S C L T local C T U X No K X M R F 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 Bytes When an error occurs S V7 N E S C L T local A T U X No K X M R F 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 Bytes lt Write target memory setting gt V6 internal memory PLC memory within 16 bits PLC memory over 16 bits Memory card Temperature cotrol Temperature cotrol PLC memory within 16 bits PLC memory over 16 bits Par B 8 3 28 3 22 3 28 118 72 SEE Ela 8 a 8lsz 8 5182232 So 8 8 2 acj ololg ol3 S5 3 ajla o 3 SS o alal aojo a o o 8 5 S 5 2 amp ojog 3 S 32 oiz gjs o g A elesi2 8 2128 ojz ale pA olojglge2ls ajojgles S 01 3 gles 15 E E 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 4 10 2 2 4 2 2 2 4 2 2 8 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 Bytes Writes AB12 to the addresses D0100 to 101 0064 to 0065H on the PLC connected to the V7 of the station number 1 Command S Data E S C L T V7 write numee T U x opal command Baris Model Type Address Reserved for system A B 4 2 X MI R F 41H 42H 31H 32H ot 2tu 024 ot 004 0064n _ oooooooooon lt 3 A 71 20m 02H 30431H 32H31H 30H32H 30H31H 30H30H 30H30H36H34H 30H30H30H30H30H30H30H30H30H30H 344314 344324 334314 334324 03H 32H41H ODH OAH Response s A lels lel Normal communication T vw C T U x orel K X M R F o 024 304314 304304
115. 2 Sys Program A Version 1 010 Versid WE Driver Font Date ENGLISH Font Date E Zu Version 1 300 1 010 1 000 Versiq Font Data I F Driver GENERAL VF Driver a Version 1 240 Select Folder Versid Sys Program l Select Folder Screen PLC Type GENERAL Screen PLC Ty e wo Screen Comment Screen Comment Display lt Card Display lt Card Select D Select Data Be Return Select the desired data and press the Select Data switch Return Card Transfer Card Transfer CF Card File Info Data Selection Folder Name AAAAAAAA CF Card File Info Data Selection Folder Name AAAAAAAA Rest Size 29437KB Select All DSP0000 BIN DSP0000 BIN Select All Rest Size 29437KB Screen Data Screen Data EG gt Sys Program SSS Sys Program gt Versiq I F Driver Versi 1 F Driver Font Date Font Date Versiq E D Versi Font Data A A gt I F Driver I F Driver Sys Program Versiq Select Folder Versi Select Folder Screen PLC Type Screen PLC Type Screen Comment Screen Comment Display lt Card Pisplay lt Card gt Select Data Select Dat Return Return NG To cancel the Data Selection window press the Return switch
116. 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin male O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a Use shielded twist pair cables RS 422 Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 22 IDEC PLC 22 Available PLCs IDEC PLC Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection MICRO3 MICRO3 Loader port RS 232C IDEC cable FC2A KC1 or IDEC cable FC2A KC2 Wiring Diagram 1 When using RS 232C cable FC2A KC2 made by IDEC connect the cable shown in Wiring Diagram 3 to the D sub 9 pin side of the FC2A KC2 cable for communications with the V7 series Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port 1 1 Parity Even Even a Data length 7 7 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 input 1 Q output 2 M internal relay 3 R shift register 4 TS timer set value 5 TN timer enumerated value 6 T timer contact 7 Read only CS
117. 2Way Table Time Display Time display function provided Hard Copy Screen hard copy function provided Buzzer Buzzer provided 2 sounds short beep long beep Auto OFF Function Always ON random setting Self diagnostic Function Switch self test function Communication parameter setting check function Communication check function 1 The number of setting memory locations is limited to 1024 per screen 2 Layer 4 per screen base 3 overlaps IL fe Q w D ie O D Q gt O 0 o n 1 14 5 Dimensions and Panel Cut out B Dimensions and Panel Cut out V708 V708i External View and Dimensions Unit mm e Side View e Front View 233 A Q S 00 ES Y e Rear View e Bottom View q e Panel Cut out Dimensions 220 515 gt 165 525 5 Dimensions and Panel Cut out 1 15 V710 V710i External View and Dimensions Unit mm i r I e Side View e Front View o D oO 303 8 mn O o O o n N e Rear View e Bottom View SE a a 000 000 B 00 000000 gt El a ASE 0 7 gt A 288 0 215 2
118. 32C Wiring Diagram 1 O A1S A1SJ A2S A1SJ71C24 R4 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 O A1SJ71C24 PRF RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O A2CCPUC24 CPU built in link port RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O A1SJ71UC24 R2 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O QnH A mode a A1SJ71UC24 R4 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 O RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 AJ71QC24N gag l O RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 Xx RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 AJ71QC24 Wiring Diagram O dais Q2A Q3A Q4A RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 x QnA series link gt Q2ASx RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O A1SJ71QC24 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 x AJ71QC24 R4 CH1 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 6 x AJ71QC24 R4 CH2 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 x er RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O QnH Q series link QnH Q mode QJ71024 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 x A link Net10 Communication link unit for A series link x 1 For more information on A link Net10 refer to page 5 15 O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt oO v z O a EW vrsusisu Pic A Series CPU QnA Series CPU QnH Series CPU Select PLC Type CPU Unit Port Connection PLC2Way A2A A3A A2U A3U A4U A2US H A1N A2N A3N A3V A73 RS 422 A series CPU A3H A3M Hakko Electronics cable A0J2H Tool port MB CPUO x A1S H A1SJ H or A2S H Wiring Diagram 7 A2CCPUC24 A1FX Q2A Q3A Q4A Q2AS H QnA series CPU QnH A series CPU QO6H A Q02 Q02H RS 232C QnH Q series QO06H Tool port 2 Hakko Electronics
119. 33 Temperature control PLC2 memory 32 bit 83H 3833 6 V Link Type Code Type Hexadecimal ASCII u user memory 00H 3030 V7 internal s system memory 01H 3031 memory L non volatile word memory 02H 3032 LD non volatile double word memory 03H 3033 PLC memor Depends on the PLC to be used Set the type number indicated for y Available Memory of respective PLCs on the Hardware Specifications Depends on the PLC to be connected to the temperature controller and Temperature PLC2 function Set the type number indicated for Available Memory of control PLC2 respective temperature controllers on the Temperature Control Network memory Manual Set the type number indicated for Available Memory of respective PLCs on the Hardware Specifications when using the PLC2Way function Address Specify the memory address to be accessed Expansion code Set the slot number of the SPU memory of the MITSUBISHI PLC or the CPU number of the YOKOGAWA PLC Example MITSUBISHI Slot No 0 00H A If no expansion code or port number MITSUBISHI Slot No 1 01H is required enter 00 3030 in the YOKOGAWA CPU No 1 00H ASCII code YOKOGAWA CPU No 2 01H Port number 1 1 Multi link ooocccccccccnnnnonnnnonnnnnnnnn Not used M lt dropa niseni aiena PLC port number Temperature controller Temperature controller port number File No Specify
120. 6 T LINK WED 6 T LINK T LINK e To use T LINK communications on the V7 series the communication interface unit CU 01 must be mounted When the V7 series is equipped with the communication interface unit CU 01 it becomes a T LINK ready device e The V7 series that supports T LINK communications can perform long distance high speed data transmission with the FUJI ELECTRIC s PLC MICREX F series e The V7 series updates the display when the read data V7 series lt PLC is changed The V7 series reads data from the PLC memory addresses that are allocated to the items placed on the screen such as lamp parts or counter parts When switch data or counter setting data on the V7 series should be written the V7 series issues a write command to the PLC and writes the output data to the PLC memory These operations are automatically performed on the V7 series and no special communication program is required on the PLC side Write request to the PLC Z 2 Q O o 3 3 Z gt O a 5 D V7 series PLC Write operation Read operation SE EA ATA HL MD Lamp Numerical Numerical data data character display entry switch Graph Read request to the PLC END 7 PROFIBUS DP 7 PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS e PROFIBUS is an open field bus independent on the bender that is used for various applications in factory automation and process automation PROFIBUS p
121. 65535 However since some numbers are already used the setting range available with V7i is from 2049 to 65535 It is recommended to set a greater number Select Port Select either AUI or 1OBASE T When connecting to the 10BASE T connector LAN of V7i select 10BASE T Select either 10BASE T or AUI when CU 03 is mounted Memory Protect Attach a check mark M when write protecting the internal memory or memory card Default Gateway Attach a check mark M when setting the default gateway Default Gateway A gateway and a router are used for communicating between different networks The IP address of the gateway router should be set to communicate with the node s on other network Subnet Mask Attach a check mark M when setting the subnet mask When this option is checked it is set to 255 255 255 0 Z o 2 Q x O o 3 3 Cc gt O a 5 n 1 Ethernet Subnet Mask A subnet mask is used for dividing one network address into multiple networks subnet The subnet is assigned by specifying a part of the host address in the IP address as a subnet address Class B 10 Network address 14 Host address 16 255 255 255 0 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network address Subnet address Host address Subnet mask 1 Ethernet 4 19 V SFT Setting Macro This section explains the macro commands SEND EREA
122. 71C24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R2 Sw18 Sw21 sw22 sw23 sw24 Example 2 Signal level RS 232C baud rate 19200 bps transmission mode 1 STATION No STATION No MODE x1 ON Swo3 SW04 SWO5 Swo6 Swo7 ON Sw08 OFF AJ71QC24 A1SJ710C24 AJ71QC24N Example 3 Baud rate 19200 bps STATION No STATION No MODE x1 swog Sw10 Sw11 Sw12 swo1 swo2 swo3 swo4 Swo5 Swo6 ON OFF SW07 ON Swo08 swog sw10 Sw11 swi2 1 MITSUBISHI PLC 5 7 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71C24 R4 Example 4 Signal level RS 422 baud rate 19200 bps transmission mode 1 STATION No STATION No MODE ON x10 x1 swo1 I swo2 E swo3 swo4 E swo5 E ON swoe E OFF swo7 E swos E swo9 m swio E swit E swi2 E O O 5 5 oO O e 5 Le O v O 19 EE wTsvusisui Pic Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs A Series Link QnA Series Link QnH Q Series Link A Series C
123. Approx 50 000 h Backlight Auto OFF Function Always ON random setting Contrast Adjustment Provided Not provided Brightness f 2 Adjustment Not provided 3 levels Surface Sheet Material Polycarbonate 0 3 mm thick POWER Lamp ON when the power is supplied 1 When the normal temperature is 25 C and the surface luminance of the display is 50 of the initial setting 2 Adjustable with function switches Touch Panel Specifications Item Specifications Method Analog resistance film type Switch Resolution 1024 W x 1024 H Mechanical Life One million activations or more Surface Treatment Hard coated anti glare treatment 5 4 Specifications Function Switch Specifications 1 11 Item Specifications Number of Switches 8 Method Pressure sensitive Mechanical Life One million activations or more Interface Specifications Item Specifications Serial Interface for PLC Connection D sub 25 pin female RS 232C RS 422 485 Asynchronous type Data length 7 8 bits Parity even odd none Stop bit 1 2 bits Baud rate 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 115 kbps Serial Interface 1 2 for Screen Data Transfer External Connection Modular jack 8 pin RS 232C RS 422 485 2 wire connection CREC Barcode V I O Multi link 2 Temperature control network PLC2Way V link etc
124. C2Way Table Setting dialog Use Periodical Reading Check this option when the following operation is required e Constant read from the PLC memory e Data sampling in the PLC2 memory Read Cycle sec Set the cycle of reading data in the PLC2 memory Store Target PLC Memory When storing data read from the PLC2 memory into the PLC memory check this box and set the desired memory address Store Target Internal Memory When storing data read from the PLC2 memory into the V7 internal memory check this box and set the desired memory address Temp CTRL PLC2Way Comm Setting Clicking this button brings up the Temp CTRL PLC2Way Comm Setting dialog and allows you to review the setting 7 PLC2Way Data Sampling in the PLC2 Memory To perform data sampling in the PLC2 memory the following settings are required Temperature control network PLC2Way table editing Buffering area setting Memory card setting when SRAM or CF Card is selected for Store Target in the Buffering Area Setting dialog Trend sampling or data sampling setting setting for displaying data stored in the specified buffer Buffering area setting Click System Setting gt Buffering Area Setting The Buffering Area Setting dialog is opened LIL Setting 2 7 e loa 10 1 Mo a a To Info Output Memory u16340 E IV Use Sample Buffer I Memory Designation Poon HH Sampling Method Temp Control Net P
125. C2Way Table setting Read Cycle D00100 E IV Store Target PLC Memory IV Store Target Internal Memory u00100 E DK Cancel When 1 is clicked the Memory Input dialog is displayed Set the memory address to be read from the PLC connected at the MJ port When 2 is clicked a data type for the PLC2 memory can be set Word This is the data length setting for the memory address to be used Numerical data of one word is handled Data is transferred to the target memory address in the numerical data code of the PLC2 memory Double Word This is the data length setting for the memory address to be used Numerical data of two words is handled Data is transferred to the target memory address in the numerical data code of the PLC2 memory Bit Data in the PLC2 memory is handled as bit information of one word Data is transferred to the target memory address without conversion Dummy Word Dummy Double The memory addresses for Target PLC Memory and Target Internal Memory are automatically allocated consecutively in the Temp CTRL PLC2Way Table Setting dialog If you would like to skip any memory address keep the cell in the Temp CTRL PLC2 Mem column blank no setting It is regarded as a dummy word or double word In this case 0 is stored in the target memory address 7 PLC2Way 3 41 When the data code in the target memory address is BCD The code numerical data format f
126. D EWRITE used for the Ethernet For more information on macro commands refer to the Reference Manual Function Macro Command EREAD Words from the F1 memory in the V7 series of the network table number specified for F3 are read into the FO memory F2 designates the number of words to be read Usable Devices Internal PLC Memory Indirect Double Memory Memory Constant Card Designation word IP Address F1 O O O O F2 O O F3 O O O EREAD Read into memory EREAD FO F1 C F2 F3 Example Macro command at the V7 A The macro command for V7 A to read data from PLC B and transfer it to PLC A is shown below Description EREAD D200 D100 C 2 B Top memory address Address of the source of the source Network table number Top memory address The number of words of the target to be transferred Contents Two words starting from D100 in PLC B are read into D200 in PLC A Ethernet lt V7 B gt D100 101 lt PLC A gt _ iy Tal lt PLC B gt llo Z Z 2 Q O o 3 3 Z gt O a 5 a 1 Ethernet EWRITE Words from the F2 memory are written into the FO memory in the V7 series of the network table number specified for F1 F3 designates the number of words to be written Usable Devices Memory
127. D3 13 RXD3 24 RXD3 25 Use shielded twist pair cables SU 6M Terminal block connectable 11 Allen Bradley PLC 11 Allen Bradley PLC Available PLCs 1756 system Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection 1785 KE RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 PLC 5 PLC 5 y Wiri 1770 KF2 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 6 CPU processor module a f RS 232C channel RS 232C Wiring Diagram 3 SLC500 SLC 5 03 and later AS 2320 Wiring Di 2 A Wiring Diagram TNE RS 422 Wiring Diagram 7 A B s RS 232C 4 Micro Logix 1000 Micro Logix 1000 Port on CPU Ladder died RS 232 Wiring Diagram 5 Control Logix Control Logix Logix5550 1 When using RS 232C ladder transfer cable made by Allen Bradley connect the cable shown in Wiring Diagram 3 to the D sub 9 pin side of the ladder transfer cable for communications with the V7 series Communication Setting 11 Allen Bradley PLC The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows PLC 5 series Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even RS 232C Transmission mode RS 422 1785 KE not supported A Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 Protocol Full duplex fixed Error check BCC fixed Response NO fixed SLC500 se
128. Diagram 3 Wiring Diagram 6 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows MASTER K10 60 200 Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps fixed Parity None fixed o Data length 8 fixed Transmission code Stop bit 1 fixed MASTER K500 1000 Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Parity None fixed T Data length 8 fixed Transmission code Stop bit 1 fixed 1 For signal level RS 422 baud rate is fixed to 9600 bps 19 LGPLC ET MASTER KxxxS Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 38400 bps 38400 bps Parity None fixed o Data length 8 fixed Transmission code Stop bit 1 fixed MASTER KxxxS CNET GLOFA CNET ltem Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 38400 bps 38400 bps Parity Not provided Not provided Jed Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a MASTER K10 60 200 Memory
129. ES5 734 1BD20 cable made by SIEMENS connect the cable shown in Wiring Diagram 3 to the D sub 25 pin side of the 6ES5 734 1BD20 cable for communications with the V7 series Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows S5 S5 V4 S5 90U S5 95U S5 100U Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Parity Even parity Even A Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Busy signal NO fixed Hand shake OFF fixed 15 SIEMENS PLC 5 91 S5 S5 V4 S5 115U S5 135U S5 155U S7 300 S7 400 Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Parity Even fixed als Data length 8 fixed Transmission code Stop bit 1 fixed S5 PG port Communication parameters are automatically set S7 200PPI Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port 2 2 Parity Even fixed S7 300MPI HMI ADP S7 300MPI PC ADP O O 5 5 oO O e 5 e v O 19 Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting HMI ADP 38400 bps fixed Baud rate 38400 bps PC ADP 38400 bps Parity Odd fixed er Data length 8 fixed Transmission code Stop bit 1 fixed Local No PLC port number 2 2 e Set MPI SETTING in
130. H Q series CPU in the Select PLC Type dialog 2 PLC programming software port setting Select Modular Jack from the System Setting menu Select Ladder Tool for Modular Jack 1 or Modular Modular Jack x m Modular Jack 1 m Modular Jack 2 Edit E CN d Jack 2 in the Modular Jack dialog C Memo Cad eea C Barcode C Barcode C v0 C v0 Temp PLC2Way Temp PLC2Way C V Link C V Link Touch Switch Ladder Tool Modbus Slave Printer Serial Port Touch Switel CC Ladder Tool Modbus Slave Printer Serial Port Cancel Communications with V SFT editor for screen data transfer On line editing between the V SFT editor and the V7 series is not possible If attempted communications between the PLC programming software and the PLC will not be performed correctly e With Ladder Tool selected for Modular Jack 2 MJ1 will be Editor Port when the Main Menu screen is displayed on the V7 series and communications with the V SFT editor become possible e With Ladder Tool selected for Modular Jack 1 even when the Main Menu screen is displayed on the V7 series communications with the PLC programming software continue so that communications with the V SFT editor are not available When communicating with the V SFT editor hold down the F2 switch for three seconds 2002 4 1 07 23 30
131. H series e When using the V SFT editor and the PLC programming software When using two V6 CP cables When the computer has two COM ports use one port for the V SFT editor and the other port for the PLC programming software Use the V6 CP cables It is not possible to transfer the V SFT editor and the PLC programming software at the same time Communications between the PLC programming A software and the PLC Communications between the V SFT editor and V7 ee Communications between V7 and the PLC gt V6 CP QCPU2 MJT a Rs 2320 3 Von GPPW a K gt aI V SFT A 7 q o AAA 5 COM2 MJ2 Computer PC cove V6 CP V7 series MITSUBISHI QnH series When using one V6 CP cable When using the V SFT editor and the PLC programming software it is not possible to use one COM port for both purposes at the same time Stop using both software for communications V6 CP lt gt QCPU2 lt yj So Computer PC V7 series MITSUBISHI QnH series O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 1 MITSUBISHI PLC Settings and Communications 1 PLC type setting Select PLC Type from the System Setting menu Select MITSUBISHI Qn
132. Hardware Specifications MONITOUCH V7 HAKKO TOUCH OPERATION FLAT PANEL MONTITOUCH V7 Record of Revisions Reference numbers are shown at the bottom left corner on the back cover of each manual Printing Date Reference No Revised Contents September 2002 2010NE0 First edition Preface Thank you for selecting the MONITOUCH V7 series For correct set up of MONITOUCH you are requested to read through this manual to understand more about the product For more information about the V7 series refer to the following related manuals Manual Name Contents Reference No Reference Manual Operation The V SFT operating procedure is described 1043NE Reference Manual Function The functions and instructions of the V7 V6 series are 1044NE explained Universal Serial Connection Manual Universal serial specifications and commands are 1021NE described Temperature Control Network The temperature control network function is explained 1033NE Specifications for Communication Instructions for CC LINK are contained 1028NE Unit CC LINK Specifications for Communication Instructions for PROFIBUS DP are contained 1036NE Unit PROFIBUS DP M CARD SFTE Operation Manual The operating procedure of the memory card editor is 1023NE described For further details about PLCs programmable logic controllers see the manual attached to each PLC No
133. I Use Simulator Program C Font Data TF Read comments in data transfer C Temp PLC2 All data transfer C Ex Font IP address for transfer target eo C SRAM Data Station No Table C Ladder comm pra Modbus comm pra P MODEM Transfer PC lt PC lt gt nf Up date of System Cancel E 6 Data transfer is started V SFT Setting PLC Type Communication Parameter To enable Ethernet communications on the V7 series the following setting is required on the V SFT editor e PLC type setting e Communication parameter setting e Network table editing In this section the PLC type setting and communication parameter setting are explained Connection Example Server Ethernet H Ethernet ready PLC An 1 RS 232C gt RS 485 Paja l it There are two connecting methods between the V7 series and the PLC A Connecting to the PLC through RS 232C or RS 485 interface B Connecting to the PLC on the Ethernet 1 Ethernet 4 11 The contents of the system setting vary depending on the method selected Check the connecting method and make the setting on the V SFT editor A Connecting to the PLC through RS 232C or RS 485 interface 1 PLC type setting Select System Setting gt PLC Type and select the P
134. LC 1 gt Y7 1 gt Y 7 2 gt Y7 n gt Ethernet ready PLC only ezo The V7 series can communicate with multiple PLCs on the Ethernet Ethernet lA LL lt PLC 1 gt lt PLC n gt amp 7 1 gt lt amp 7 n gt Ethernet ready PLC only 1 Ethernet Notes on Ethernet Communications For V7i e To use Ethernet communications on V7i use the 10BASE T connector LAN provided on the unit It is not possible to use Ethernet or FL net OPCN 2 communications by attaching the communication I F unit CU 03 to V7i at the same time When CU 03 is mounted the 10BASE T connector LAN provided on the unit cannot be used e When using Ethernet communications with CU 03 mounted the Web server or e mail function cannot be used For V7 e To use Ethernet communications on V7 the communication interface unit CU 03 must be mounted When V7 is equipped with the communication interface unit CU 03 it becomes Ethernet ready In this case however the Web server or e mail function is not available IP Address for the V7 Series To enable Ethernet communications on the V7 series it is necessary to set the IP address for identification of the V7 series on the network The IP address should be set on the Main Menu screen of the V7 s
135. LC to be used 2 Communication parameter setting xi Select System Setting gt Comm Main Detai Parameter Attach a check mark M to Baud Rate 182008PS gt Use Ethernet SignalLevel RS232C C AS422 Read Area poo 3 Select System Setting gt Network Table Setting gt Ethernet gt The network table edit window is displayed Edit the network table For more information on pra oea al network table editing refer to page 4 14 Write Area D00050 e I Read Write Area GD 80 Compatible Default Cancel Apply B Connecting to the PLC on the Ethernet 1 PLC type setting Select System Setting gt PLC Type and select the PLC that shows xxxxx Ethernet At present April 2002 the following PLC models are supported PLC Model PLC Unit Connection Section on V SFT QnA series Q2A Q3A Q4A AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71 B5 10BASE T connection Ethernet Q2ASx A1SJ71QE71 B2 Twist pair cable A1SJ71QE71 B5 Category 5 ant QnH Q series QnH Q mode QJ71E71 QJ71E71 B2 AUI connection Ethernet AUI cable FA M3 FA M3 R FA M3 F3LE01 5T F3LE11 0T Ethernet FA M3 R 1 For AUI connection a transceiver is required The memory use is the same as the one for 1 1 connection Refer to Chapter 5 Connection to PLCs The data code of the V7 series is fixed to the binary code Be sure to set the binary code for the data code on the PLC Z 2 Q O o 3
136. LC2 y No of Table 0 E Store Target Intemal Buffer Sampling Time 0 E me C SRAM C CF Card No of Samples 100 Es r Full Processing Gt o a Continuous Message GN 0 El Stop I Use Start Bit I Replay Sound Consec Cancel Sampling Method Temperature Control Net PLC2 No of Table Select the temperature control network PLC2Way table number for sampling Sampling Time Specify the number of sampling times Store Target Internal Buffer SRAM SF Card Choose the desired medium for storing sampling data Internal Buffer Stores data in the internal buffer of the V7 series RAM SRAM Stores data in the SRAM area SRAM mounted on the unit V7EM S REC MCARD SRAM CF Card Stores data in the CF card Full Processing Continuous Stop Choose the desired processing when the target medium space has been used up Continuous When Sampling Time has been exceeded data from the oldest is discarded Stop When Sampling Time has been exceeded sampling is stopped 7 PLC2Way 3 43 e Calculating the buffering area capacity When Internal Buffer is selected for Store Target in the Buffering Area Setting the maximum available capacity is 32K words When Temp Control Net PLC2 is selected for Sampling Method the required capacity can be calculated as shown below 1 sample Words 2 words Buffer size Sampling Times x 1 sample Words here means the number of w
137. LCs 7 PLC2Way WEN Wiring Two kinds of cables are available for PLC2Way connection at the MJ port Cable connections are explained Connecting method 1 using MJ D25 e To connect the PLC and the V7 series at the MJ port use the Hakko Electronics MJ to D sub conversion cable MJ D25 0 3 m metric thread and the cable for 1 1 connection at CN1 For more information on the cable for 1 1 connection at CN1 refer to Wiring in Chapter 5 Connection to PLCs e This combination of cables MJ D25 1 1 connection cable can be used either for RS 232C or RS 485 RS 422 2 wire connection 1 1 connection cable MJ D25 RS 232C RS 485 RS 422 DJ i gt fa e With RS 485 2 wire connection a maximum of 31 PLCs can be connected For information on connection between PLCs refer to the instruction manual for the PLC Connecting method 2 using V6 TMP e Use Hakko Electronics cable V6 TMP 3 m when connecting the V7 series to a PLC at the MJ port The shielded frame ground of V6 TMP must be connected to the V7 series V6 TMP Notes on Use of V6 TMP There are six wires in the V6 TMP cable as Brown 5V shown on the right The wires to be used are Red 0V SG determined depending on the connecting gt Orange RXD method For the wires not used be sure to Yellow TXD properly insulate with tape etc Black SD RD Green
138. Link and make the setting for communications between the V7 series and the computer Refer to Modular Select the modular jack to be used Modular Jack 1 Modular Jack 2 Baud Rate 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115 kbps Local Port 1 to 31 Set the port number of the V7 series Send Delay Time msec Set a time delay in sending a response after receipt of data Parity None Odd Even Signal Level RS 232C RS 485 With RS 232C one V7 series can be connected with RS 485 a maximum of 31 V7 series can be connected Data Length 7 bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit 2 bit Use sum check Check this option when using a sum check Add CR LF Check this option when adding CR LF 6 v Link MED Protocol Read with sum check and CR LF Read Command Command A S V7 Number Read target E S C L Mm T local Read lofwords memory T U command to read a X No setting X M R F v 1 2 2 2 18 1 2 1 1 Bytes Q 3 3 E Response 5 S V7 L 5 Normal communication T local fet X No F o gt n 1 2 1 Bytes When an error occurs S V7 NJ E S C L T local A T U X No K X M R F 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 Bytes lt Read target memory setting gt V7 internal memory PLC memory within 16 bits PLC memory over 16 bits Memory card Temperatur
139. M0000 BIN2002 04 01 12 51 26 i ta a ee 5 E e Indicates the free space in the CF card F2 FS Select Folder Used for checking or renaming folder Ea names A O Starts transferring data a Display lt Card Return Moves back to the previous screen 1 To change another folder press the Select Folder switch The folder name must be SRAMO00O0 BIN 2 The Select Folder screen is displayed as shown on page 2 17 Select the desired folder refer to page 2 17 and press the OK switch 3 Moves back to the SRAM Transfer screen 4 Starting Data Transfer Check the folder name free space and transfer selection press the Start switch Data transfer is started 5 Ending Data Transfer When data has been transferred successfully the following window is displayed Work normally finished Press the OK switch If any other message is displayed refer to the next page 6 Pressing the Return switch moves back to the Card Menu screen 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 3 4 Messages during Data Transfer If an error occurs during data transfer the message window shown on the right is displayed The kinds and the contents of the messages are shown below The same messages are used for the memory card and CF card When using the CF card the memory card in the explanation should read as the CF card Data discrepant Messages Contents Work
140. NCE PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male SD RD 2 3 RS 4 5 7 Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC Modular Connector 6pin are 123456 te AA x Use shielded twist pair cables 18 KEYENCE PLC Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC A 7 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 5 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC gt Modular jack 6 pin 3 RD 4 SG 5 SD 123456 vo vo p lt Use shielded twist pair cables RS 422 Wiring Diagram 6 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 19 LG PLC 19 LG PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Connection MASTER K10 60 200 K10 60 200 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 MASTER K500 1000 K500 1000 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 MASTER KxxxS K200S K300S K1000S CPU port MASTER KxxxS CNET K4F CUEA GLOFA CNET G4L CUEA RS 232C RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 RS 232C Wiring
141. PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection PGU port RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 PCD PCD1 PCD7 F120 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 PCD4 F110 RS 485 Wiring Diagram 3 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 1 a Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 S BUS Configuration S BUS Mode Parity GU Port Number Available Memory 0 PGU port 1 PCD7 F120 PCD4 F110 The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks R register word 0 Rfp float 1 T timer counter word 2 C timer counter coil 3 l input bit 4 read only O output bit 5 F flag bit 6 26 SAIA PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 sub 25 pin male Oo PLC PGU port Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC PCD7 F120 a oa eee O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a Use shielded twist pair cables RS 485 Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC
142. PU QnA Series CPU QnH A Series CPU QnH Q Series CPU A Link Net10 Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 WwW link register 1 R file register 2 1 TN timer current value 3 CN counter current value 4 SPU special unit 5 2 M internal relay 6 L latch relay 7 B link relay 8 X input relay 9 Y output relay 10 TS timer contact 11 TC timer coil 12 CS counter contact 13 CC counter coil 14 H link unit buffer memory 15 SD special register 16 QnA QnH Q series only both link unit and CPU SM special relay 17 QnA QnH Q series only both link unit and CPU SB special link relay 18 QnA QnH Q series only both link unit and CPU SW special link register 19 QnA QnH Q series only both link unit and CPU ZR file register continuous access 20 QnA QnH Q series only both link unit and CPU 1 When the A series CPU is in ROM operation R register cannot be used 2 The unit number is required in addition to the memory type and address Convert byte address into word address when entering the data on the V SFT editor if the memory device of link unit is given byte address 1 MITSUBISHI PLC MEN FX Series FX1S Series Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 TN timer current value 1 CN counter current value 2 32CN counter 32 bits 3 1
143. RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 Universal port 1 on CPU ar z RS 485 Wiring Diagram 7 Programmer port on Hera MEM a P KOYO s programmer SU 5M 6 connecting cable S 30JG E Universal port 3 on CPU RS 485 Wiring Diagram 8 Universal port 2 on CPU PORT1 on CPU RS 232C programmer port KOYO s programmer SZ 4 PORT2 on CPU connecting cable S 30JG E SU SG universal K Sequence communication port KOYO s conversion connector PORT1 on CPU cable S 15CNJ programmer port RS 232C KOYO s programmer connecting cable S 30JG E SZ 4M PORT2 on CPU universal communication port KOYO s conversion connector cable 15CNJ KOYO s conversion connector S 15HCNP1 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 x 10 1 x 1 1 Parity Odd Odd wk Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Functions Host link function fixed Response delay time 0 fixed Timeout None fixed ASCII HEX HEX fixed O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a END o kovopic Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs SU SG SU SG
144. RS 422 485 PLC Terminal block RS 422 485 RS 485 2 wire CN1 MJ1 2 CN1 CN1 CN1 V7 master station V7 slave station V7 slave station V7 slave station Local Port 1 Local Port 2 Local Port 3 Local Port 4 ON When MJ1 is O A O used Pr Rao ON When MJ2 is mm l used BOE V SFT Setting The following settings must be made on the V SFT editor Only the points different from those described in 1 1 1 Connection V SFT Setting page 3 3 are explained here PLC Selection Select the PLC that is connected e Setting Position System Setting gt PLC Type gt Select PLC Type dialog gt Check Display Multi link2 PLC The PLC list compatible with multi link 2 connection is displayed Communication Parameter Setting e Setting Position System Setting gt Comm Parameter gt Comm Parameter dialog e Setting Items Connection Select Multi Link 2 Click Setting The Multi Link 2 dialog is displayed Make the necessary settings For the V7 series master station set the following items For the V7 series slave station set the items marked with Local Port 1 to 4 Set the port number of the V7 series For the V7 series master station set 1 For the V7 series slave st
145. S 485 data 2 SD RD RS 485 data 12345678 3 5V Externally supplied 5 V 4 5V MAX 150 mA 5 SG Sanat d ignal groun 4 6 SG ae 7 RD RS 232C receive data 8 SD RS 232C send data 12 Modular Jack MJ1 MJ2 V SFT Setting 1 The use of modular jacks 1 and 2 can be set on the V SFT editor 2 Select Modular from the System Setting menu The Modular Jack dialog is displayed Select the use of modular jacks 1 and 2 from the following options Modular Jack 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Editor Port Memory Card 2 Barcode V l O 4 Multi Link 5 Temp CTRL PLC2Way V Link Touch Switch Ladder Tool Modbus Slave Printer Serial Pory Modular Jack 2 Not used Memory Card 2 Barcode V 0 Multi Link 8 Temp CTRL PLC2Way V Link Touch Switch Ladder Tool Modbus Slave Serial Printer Serial Port Refer to the next section Transferring Screen Data Select this option when connecting the card recorder CREC Refer to the next section Barcode Reader Connection Select this option when connecting the serial extension I O V I O Select this open when Multi link 2 is selected for Connection and 1 is set for Local Port on the Comm Parameter dialog Select this option when connecting the temperature controller network or PLC2Way Select this option for V Link connection Refer to E
146. Self diagnosis 6 OFF Turn around delay 7 OFF Response delay time 0 msec 8 OFF 9 OFF HEX mode 10 kovoriICc ED Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a Use shielded twist pair cables 1 High density D sub 15 pin 10 KOYO PLC RS 422 Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables isoo N 25 Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 5 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 10 KOYO PLC Wiring Diagram 6 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male 4 PLC 1 r a D sub 15 pin male 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a a sf Use shielded twist pair cables 1 High density D sub 15 pin Wiring Diagram 7 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC 1 gt D sub 25 pin male O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 Xot u Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 8 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male SG 7 TXD3 12 TX
147. TW as word device Cc counter 15 CW as word device A special auxiliary relay 16 AW as word device 14 TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC MED Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC FG 1 e D sub 9 pin female Use shielded twist pair cables O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a GE 5 SIEMENS PLC 15 SIEMENS PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection S5 90U CP 521SI S5 95U 3964R Transmission RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 S5 100U Protocol S5 El CP 524 3964R RK512 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 S5 V4 S5 155U CP 544 3964R RK512 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 6 Second serial interface S5 95U 3964R Transmission SIEMENS s 6ES5 734 1BD20 Protocol cable j Programming porton RS 232C Wiring Diagram 3 S5 PG port S5 series the CPU unit g Diag s7 S7 300 CP 341 3964R RK512 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 S7 400 CP 441 3964R RK512 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 6 S7 200 PPI S7 200 series PPI RS 422 Wiring Diagram 7 S7 300MPI SIEMENS s HMI HMI ADP 87 300 400 series Agaete MPI port 6ES7 972 0CA11 0XA0 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 5 S7 300MPI SIEMENS s PC Adapter PC ADP 6ES7 9720CA23 0XA0 TI500 505 ey RS 232C Wiring Diagram 4 TI500 505 V4 119431999 CEE pen bulit in RS 422 Wiring Diagram 8 When using the 6
148. This code is received at abnormal termination ASCII Refer to the next page for more information NAK Error Codes 02H Overrun Framing error An overrun or framing error is detected in the received data Send the command again 03H Parity error A parity error is detected in the received data Send the command again 04H Sum check error A sum error occurs with the received data 06H Count error The memory read write count is 0 OFH ETX error No ETX code is found 11H Character error A character not used in the received data is found other than 0 to F Check the character and send the command again 12H Command error An invalid command is given 13H Memory setting error The address or device number is invalid END Ce V Link 1 byte Character Code List Upper A a eeke parra ee eee eae ie st fsfeluefol ey eee eee PPP ome VET 5 E E E EE O Mea fe if eye eet a E ett PePPe ft tt tt 7 PLC2Way 7 PLC2Way PLC2Way e The PLC2Way function is an original network function where one V7 series can be connected to two PLCs Even if the manufacturers of these PLCs are not the same they can be connected to one V7 series RS 232C RS 422 RS 485 Ele _ di PLC MITSUBISHI hrs RS 232C RS 422 RS 485 2 wire connection af hal YOKOGAWA PL O e Connect one PLC to the CN1 connector and the se
149. Transfer icon The Transfer dialog is displayed Q Eile Edit Display Draw Part Transfer E Deu a x a SS ae sit ime BS gt ot C Memory alas AE T Use Simulator Gece C Font Data Temp PLC2 C Ex Font SRAM Data C Station No Table C Ladder comm pra Modbus comm prg J Read comments in data transfer P MODEM Transter PC gt PC lt PC lt gt Info Up date of Syten Detail Setting 2 Attach a check mark M to L Transfer through aaa loce Ethernet LULA SRAM Data Station No Table Ladder comm prg Modbus comm pra I MODEM Transfer PC gt PC lt ro Info Up date of System 3 Press the Detail Setting switch The IP Address gt Setting dialog is displayed tweet set Z 2 Q O o 3 3 Z gt O a 5 D 4 Enter the IP address of the V7 series to which IP address Setting xl the screen data is to be transferred Hostname IP address 000 Cancel Reference When a list is shown select the IP address of IT i x the V7 series and click the lt lt switch The Hostname M7 eesse host name and the IP address are automatically entered Click OK IP address 192 168 1 68 PUENIS2 158169 1 Ethernet 5 Check the IP address and click PC gt x r Transfer Device Transfer Data Display C Memory Screen Data C 1F Driver Cc
150. U 01 RGB input sound output unit Select Ladder Tool when using the ladder transfer function with MITSUBISHI s QNHCPU port Q mode selected for the PLC type 10 Select this option for Modbus slave connection 11 Select this option when connecting the printer with serial interface Refer to page 1 37 12 Modular Jack MJ1 MJ2 1 31 3 Do not select Multi link and Temp CTRL PLC2Way for Modular Jack 1 2 at the same time e Combination of MJ1 and MJ2 Functions O Usable at the same time A Usable from system program Ver 1 010 x Not usable at the same time Temp 5 Q MJ1 Multi f Touch Ladder Printer MJ2 Link 2 CREC Barcode YVO i Ho unk Switch Tool Serial Port ay o Multi 0 LAO 0 O 0 A O O x 0 5 O O CREC O O O O 0 O O 0 O O Barcode o o o o o o o o a v 1 0 O 0 0 oO 0 O Oo 0 Temp CTRL PLC A O 0 Oo O Oo Oo 0 2Way V Link O ie 0 O Oo Oo Oo 0 Touch Switch O 0 0 O O O O 0 Ladder Tool x O 0 oO O 0 O 0 Printer Serial Port 9 2 2 Q Q 2 7 D Supplemental Remark Multi link communication and temperature control network PLC2Way can be used at the same time e Combination of Communication Unit CU xx and Modular Jack Function O Usable at the same time x Not usable at the same time MJ Coe Multstink GREC Barcode VO oral ink ra See Soral gain Communication Unit CU
151. YOKOGAWAFA M3 Display gt Card Screen Comment Screen Comment Display lt gt C Display lt gt Card Data Selection spay 55 ard Dala Sen play lt gt Car Screen Data Font Data a Screen Data Font Data Start I F Driver Sys Program Cancel I F Driver Sys Program Cancel CREC Menu Memory Card Information Return tee ee fom YOKOGAWA FA 1 250 YOKOGAWAFA M3 Display gt Card Screen Comment Display lt gt Card Work normally finished Start Cancel Display lt Card Press the OK switch 6 Press the Close switch The Card Menu screen is displayed again 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 215 3 2 Transferring Screen Data from a CF Card CF Card Folder Configuration Folders in the CF card are configured as shown below F 5 Folder Name Folder Name File Name CF card AAAAAAAA DSP DSP0000 BIN O Z BBBBBBBB camp MCMHEAD BIN MCMxxxx BIN O SRAM SRMO000 BIN a FFFFFFFF m MEMO MEMxxxx BIN O L RECIPE RECxxxx CSV g 1 These are access folders set by the SMPxxxx BIN g we SAMPLE V SFT editor Any folder name within SMPxxxx CSV fe eight 1 byte characters
152. a possibility that water corrosive gas flammable gas solvents grinding fluids or cutting oil can come into contact with the unit Avoid high temperature high humidity and outside weather conditions such as wind rain or direct sunlight Avoid locations where excessive dust salt and metallic particles are present Avoid installing the unit in a location where vibration or physical shock may be transmitted e Equipment must be correctly mounted so that the main terminal of MONITOUCH will not be touched inadvertently e Tighten the MONITOUCH mounting screws to the specified torque Excessive tightening may distort the panel surface Loose tightening may cause MONITOUCH to come off malfunction or be short circuited e Tighten terminal screws on the power input terminal block equally to a torque of 0 5 Nem e Check the appearance of MONITOUCH when it is unpacked Do not use the unit if any damage or deformation is found e MONITOUCH has a glass screen Do not drop or give physical shock to the unit Notes on Cable Connection e Connect the cables correctly to the terminals of MONITOUCH in accordance with the specified voltage and wattage Over voltage over wattage or incorrect cable connection could cause fire malfunction or damage to the unit e Be sure to establish a ground of MONITOUCH The FG terminal must be used exclusively for the unit with the level of grounding resistance less than 100 Q e Prevent any conducti
153. a stored in the specified buffer number trend sampling or data sampling must be set Click the Trend Sampling or Data Sampling icon and make the setting For more information refer to the Reference Manual Function Trend sampling Data sampling EVS Editor for Windows Version 2 00 D Japanese monitouch y7 Ether 7 V7 07 640 480 32k Colona 6 3 QQ Ele Edt Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool Window Help alal gt OSA D Sk 01 0 14 4 95 sion No 0 MIA NEEDE RU S Eesen EARBA BASAN o 2 A OOA 1 L eR Data Transfer from the PLC2 Memory Data in the PLC2 memory can be transferred to the PLC memory V7 internal memory or a memory card at one time Conversely it is also possible to transfer data in the PLC memory V7 internal memory or a memory card to the PLC2 memory at one time To perform butch data transfer from the PLC2 memory the following settings are required e Temperature control network PLC2Way table editing For temperature control network PLC2Way table editing the setting in the Temp CTRL PLC2Way Table Setting dialog is not necessary e Macro TEMP_READ TEMP_WRITE e Memory card setting when a memory card is used 1 Macro TEMP_READ Data in the PLC2 memory addresses set in the temperature control network PLC2Way table specified for F1 is transferred to the memory addresses starting from FO Usable Devices Internal Constant Tempe
154. al screen command number 5 remains the same as before in the memory address D2 in the read area for the screen number command In such a case it is possible to forcibly switch the screen to the screen number contained in D2 in the read area at the leading edge 0 gt 1 of bit 14 of the memory address for the screen status command D1 in the read area ep oO D O 3 3 a 5 O je p O n Screen No 5 No 2 Read area n 2 Screen number command No 2 Data in the read area n 2 remains the same even if the actual screen has been switched internally Screen No 2 No 0 To show screen No 5 again using an external screen command set 0 gt 1 to bit 14 of read area n 1 No 0 Screen forced switching bit 14 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 D000 poo1 oJ 010 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 olol OJ Of 0 Screen No 0 pooz o b o 5 No 3 Screen No 5 No 2 1 1 1 Connection Write Area 3 words This is an area where the screen status is written Consecutive three words from the specified memory address are used as write area When you have converted GD 80 data to the V7 series data the number of required memory addresses vary Refer to the GD 80 User s Manual
155. am EE AAA E AE eengadecyeu wane nation wt tae Sete 2 4 2 1 Selfloop Test nace nee eo ee iis Wy ete id A ea el eee ta 2 5 2 2 Print Check 2 8 2 3 SYSTEMS Function Switch TOA td 2 8 24 TOUCO SWIM LESE noi anaa ieaie re aaea idee a aa aaa aaa aseena eiaa a aea aarda a AEA oaa 2 9 3 gt Card Men Ci aa 2 11 9 1 CREC Menu CEN iii atea aaae aTa oiiae 2 12 3 2 Transferring Screen Data from a CF Card oocnnocinicconocncannnnanccnononannnno no non cnn nana no nan crna canon 2 15 3 3 Saving Backup Copies of SRAM ccscceeceeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeseeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeaee 2 21 3 4 Messages during Data Transfer ooncononcnnocnnoncnnonnnnanonnononnancnnacrnnncnnn crac nnarnnrorcnrnacrnancns 2 23 Alo EN diiniita 2 24 5 SRAM Clock iia EA ae tds i 2 27 6 Extension Program Informati0N oonnninnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnoncnnccananccnrnc ran nc no nono annnarna nc rnr narran 2 28 7 Extended Function Setting ooooooccconncccononcccnoncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnncnonncnnnnnn nn nnnnn can nnnn cana ncnnnnnes 2 29 2 EUNctiOn SWilCheS iaa ilatina idad sla cates TYPES ii A tdt ls ta dos SYSTEM Wii Teen den indies died nina ene nines 3 Errors Displayed on the V7 Series 1 Communication Error oo cece cee ccc corn cnn arrancan narrar rre 2s A O NS A A A O AAA 4 SYSTEM ERROR coi Di 5 Touch Switch is Active ooooonicninncninccnocncnoncnonncnnn nana nonan nn nan c no nc cnn n anar nn cnn nn ran nr nr nr rn rn r
156. ao Saaran boh apai Snein Saini 1 26 dl Serial Connector EN iaa a a a a 1 28 Serial Connector for PLC Connectionin ir i a e EY 1 28 12 Mod lar Jack MIMI iii india 1 29 Modular J ck T MIIV21MI2 oia AA a a aa 1 29 V SFE Setting it is lada 1 30 Transferring screen Datart snipes areais it eee 1 32 Barcode Reader Connection scscce cvecececcossevees contentenvestecstcecaveuateossoreetencendesdenssapdatcossapdentestenstens 1 32 139 TOBASE TALA NA de 1 33 TOBASE T Connector nean a As 1 33 Notes OVINO esea e E a Ea a set sveactivyesaatiende 1 34 14 GFiGard CF AAA A a 1 35 Recommended CF Card ivi a ai 1 35 Mounting and Dismounting the CF CalO oooonccncccncnnccccnnananonaninoncnananonananan crac cnn nno canon corn rnncnccnnano 1 35 Notes on Handling the CF Gard ccncoconccnannconccconnnonenonnccononcnnnnonennoncc rn nono cnrnono ren one crono nronacancacanes 1 36 15 Printer Connection PRINTER oooconncccnnccnnnononcnnonnconnnnanc crono ronca 1 37 Printer Connector PRINTER ccsssccssssssessssessssesseesessesssesssesesseseseseaeecscessseeceeecesneveaeseaeeesees 1 37 Connection with Printer through Serial Interface oonnonciinnnnnininnonnnnnnocanacnnnarncarnnnona ran crannana canino 1 38 Chapter 2 MONITOUCH Operations 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu oococoncccnnccnoncconnnonnconnnnnnncnnnnnrnnn nono nero cn nnn cnn cnn nc cnn nan rnane cnn nncnns 2 1 Initial Screen 1 Main Menu Screen Bi WOSMOSt St
157. ara Chapter3 Serial Communications 1 VENGO ECON it eed ee a EL aad 3 1 ARA NN 3 1 WINO ieee leet coded a ace dad ehchlaatataed beet a edd Ae bel eke d a 3 2 V SFT SONG iia A n Ad 3 4 1 n Connection MultizdrOp oocccnccnnncnnnnonoconnccncnrncnnncnn nn cn nncrnnc cnc rra 3 9 ANT A ER ROTOS 3 9 Wiring RS 422 4 ii di 3 9 VES Sottingi y ale dal cad dal A e ad de dd de a A de 3 10 Notes on Communication Errors ccccccceceeececeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeseceeeeseaaeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeseneeeseeeeeees 3 10 n 1 Connection Multi link 2 MUITO Lic aid AA Ati V SFT Setting e Communication Eiro nth Ara a d e dhe i nT Connection Multilink sese aaa a aaa a aa M ltilink ae a a aE E Ea a a is Universal Serial Communications ccocccccnnncnuonanooononcnononononononononononononnnanannnnn nono roo nonononos 3 20 Universal Serial Communications coooococcncconoconacnnocononanonnnnnnnonnnononnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnncnannnnnnnnnnannnn non 3 20 V Link an WIN eh a ae ieee eet ig ee han Ee a WSF SOttinnG 252s vee cache E T ATA TAA sess dase AAE TE EEA Pr Oui id NAK Error RA rari eesti puccdct ieee ee ena S vaeienap a sid cepateeat anaes 1 byte Character Code List PLO2Way chee A eve cs ale ee a PE 2Way ecaterestne an wa neta A E ea eet acacia Ween aie Limitations on Connection at the MJ Poft ococonococcnncnconacoconcnnnonanonononnncnnnonononnnnncccanannnnnnnnnnnanonnns 3 32 8 Temper
158. ation set 2 to 4 Set the unique port number for each V7 series If the number duplicates communications will not be performed correctly 3 n 1 Connection Multi link2 B Send Delay Time 0 to 255 Unit x1 msec Set a time delay in sending the response to the Las PLC after receipt of data from the PLC Normally monrroucH Jk use the default setting 0 Send delay time t Total 2 to 4 Set the total number of the V7 series included in the multi link 2 connection Retry Cycle x10 Set the number of cycles before the master station sends an inquiry for restoration to the slave station that has a communication problem system down When a slave station has a problem it is temporarily removed from the communication targets and the master station sends an inquiry for restoration every number of cycles specified for Retry Cycle This setting does not affect the communication speed if no problem is occurring however if there is any problem it does affect the communication speed e When the setting value is small It will not take a long time before restoration e When the setting value is large It will take a longer time before restoration Supplemental Information Retrials in the Detail tab window of the Comm Parameter dialog is the number of retrials that the V7 series master station sends an inquiry to the PLC Baud Rate of Multi Link 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 76800
159. ature Control Network 0 cecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseeeesaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeaeereaee 3 52 Temperature Control NetWork ooooocccnnncccnonccicnnonccononnncnnnncnnonnccnnnnnccnnnn nn ran nc aran n cnn nan n rr cnn canina 3 52 Chapter 4 Network Communications li Ethernet iia caida i n ib 4 1 A ein A OA 4 1 Notes on Ethernet COMMUNICATIONS oonnonnnnnnnnnininnncnnoninannc nana norarn rn aran arras 4 3 IP Address for the V7 Senes y norai a aa a cnn e aa aa a ranma 4 3 Communication Interface Unit CU OB ooccccnccniccicnaniccnnanananncnnn nn na nano n arcano nora narnia 4 3 A O vou A 4 5 Transferring Screen Data vr A ie 4 8 V SFT Setting PLC Type Communication Parameter 0 cc cece eee eeee cesses nona no nonn cnn na nannnno 4 10 V SFT Setting Network Table EdItiNg oooooinnnninnnnnnnoniconnccnnonononncnara narco nan c ran ccn criar conan 4 14 V SFT Setting Macro it A A ios 4 19 System MOMOLY A Ate tb tacit ad dd ta 4 22 Ethernet Access Functions HKEtn10 DLL oooococonnccccnoncccconocccnnoncnonanaccnonnncononnn cc nano nncnnnn nn cana ncnnns 4 26 Server Communication Procedure cooococonoccccnonccccononcnnnnannncnonnconnnn cnn nan n cnn nn cnn nnnc cnn narran narran 4 44 Error Display E m EERO aN A EEE e e e 4 48 Feenet ORGNE2 p gr e a De coe ts a a A 4 48 3 MELSECNET 10 MELSECNE TAO victoria tl ta e aa A 4 49 4 5 6 7 PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS ori A di ba 4 54 Chapte
160. bi Start Time o Bise a Retials 3 a G ibi 2i Time Out Time 50 Ehe r Code DEC C BCD r Text Process 7 LSBtoMSB MSBtoLSB Default Cancel Arey Set the port number network table number of the PLC in the Memory Input dialog for each part For more information on the network table refer to page 4 14 Memory Input Type p z 00100 Edit Network Table 7 ajs EJE No Y Host Name 1P Address imeo E E ES CPES v7 192 168 1 68 15 7 PLC 192 168 1 66 15 E alejelaje ef leel Internal Mem Edit Network Table Z 2 Q A O o 3 3 Z gt O 2 5 D 1 Ethernet V SFT Setting Network Table Editing To enable Ethernet communications on the V7 series the following network table setting is required on the V SFT editor Network Table e The V7 series PLCs and PCs on the Ethernet must be registered on the network table In the case of the network illustrated below the nodes with should be registered on the network table Server Ethernet Ethernet ready PLC RS 232C ZZZ RS 485 i e The network table is transferred to the V7 series together with screen data Server Transfer Screen data lt PC gt VF driver Network table
161. by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX DFlag 0 1 2 Refer to page 4 29 Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError 1 Ethernet Read Words from Internal Memory int HKEtn_ReadInternalMemory WORD dp unsigned short Wordcnt int DeviceType DWORD addr char IpAddr int DFlag 1 This function is retained until data is transferred from the V7 series e Parameters dp Target block pointer Contents Word Count No 1 1 No 2 1 No n 1 Wordcnt Word count to be transferred max 2000 words Device Type 0 u 1 s addr Top memory address to be read lpAddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX DFlag 0 1 2 Refer to page 4 29 e Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError Z o 2 Q x O o 3 3 Cc gt O a 5 n 1 Ethernet Read Words from Memory Card Memory int HKEtn_ReadCardMemory WORD dp unsigned short Wordcnt int FileNo int RecordNo DWORD addr char IpAddr int DFlag 1 This function is retained until data is transferred from the V7 series e Parameters dp Target block pointer Contents Word Count No 1 1 No 2 1 No n 1 Wordcnt Word count to be transferred max 2000 words FileNo File number RecordNo Record number addr Top memory address to be read IpAddr IP address shown as a string of
162. cable x CPU Q12H QCPU2 Q25H 1 For more information of V MDD dual port interface refer to page 5 17 2 For the ladder transfer function used when directly connecting the QnH series CPU refer to page 5 18 1 MITSUBISHI PLC FX Series Select PLC Type CPU Unit Port Connection PLC2Way RS 232C Hakko Electronics cable PC CX24A RS 422 1 FX series CPU FNE 1091 port Hakko Electronics cable im MB CPUQ or Wiring Diagram 7 FXON RS 422 ON Hakko Electronics cable FX2N series CPU MISE FX2NC a al Tool port Hakko Electronics cable x MB CPUQ FX1 ies CPU FX1S a is MITSUBISHT s conversion cable FX 20P CADP FX2N 232 BD RS 232C Wiring Diagram 3 x FXON FX2N 485 BD RS 485 Wiring Diagram 8 x RS 422 Hakko Electronics AEREO cable MI4 FX x FX1N 232 BD RS 232C Wiring Diagram 3 x FX series link e FX1N 485 BD RS 485 Wiring Diagram 8 x A Protocol RS 422 Hakko Electronics Nee BP cable MI4 FX x FXON 232ADP RS 232C Wiring Diagram 4 x FXON FXON 485ADP RS 485 Wiring Diagram 8 x FXON 232ADP RS 232C Wiring Diagram 4 x FX2NC FXON 485ADP RS 485 Wiring Diagram 8 x 1 For more information of V MDD dual port interface refer to page 5 17 O O 5 5 oO O e 5 Le O v O 19 GZ wTsvsisui Pic Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter setting
163. case of using DCP drum count setting value set drum step No 1 to 16 The assigned memory is indicated when editing Example DCP3000 1 the screen as shown on the right A A i E Drum step number Colon Address Notes on V4 or GD 80 data conversion When converting data of V4 or GD 80 into the V7 data TI500 505 V4 is automatically selected for the PLC type With V4 or GD 80 the order of words is reversed in the case of double words Please take note of this For V4 or GD 80 For V7 MSB LSB MSB LSB Lower order word High order word High order word Lower order word 1word L jword 2 words 2 words 15 SIEMENS PLC MEX Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male TXD 2 RXD 3 GND 7 Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male FG PLC D sub 9 pin female gt 1 O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a SD RD RS Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC SSS D sub 25 pin male TXD 2 m RXD 6ES5 734 1BD20 S5 95U yv 4 Use shielded twist pair cables 15 SIEMENS PLC Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 PLC D sub 25 pin male D sub 9 pin
164. ce B input output relay 2 WB as word device L link relay 9 WL as word device E special relay 10 WF as word device TS timer set value 11 1 TR timer current value 12 1 w9 timer current value 0 1 13 1 CS counter set value 14 1 CR counter current value 15 1 BD data memory 16 1 WS step control relay 17 2 Wn file memory 18 3 1 For numerical data format where double words can be used Num Data Display Graph Sampling data is processed as double words For those where bits or words can be used data is processed as words consisting of lower 16 bits For input Upper 16 bits are ignored For output 0 is written for upper 16 bits 2 Byte device such as step relay is processed as described below For input Upper 8 bits are 0 For output Lower 8 bits are written 3 To set up the file memory on the V SFT editor enter file Example W30 00002 number colon address in order a Address Colon File number Notes on V4 or GD 80 data conversion When converting data of V4 or GD 80 into the V7 data MICREX F series V4 is automatically selected for the PLC type FLEX PC Series FLEX PC CPU Port 9 FUJI PLC 5 61 Standard Memory Toyota Version TYPE Remarks D data register D 0 WwW link register R 1 M internal relay M 2 WM as word device L latch relay K 3 WL Wk as word device X input relay X 4 WX as word device Y o
165. cess TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError Close processing int HKEtn_Close Execute this function when ending HKEtn10 dll Get Source s IP Address int HKEtn_GetSinAddr char IpAddr Execute this function after the recvfrom function or receiving the data 1 Ethernet 4 43 Get Error Contents int HKEtn_GetLastError e Error codes and solutions Code Contents Solution 1 Undefined command receive timeout Check the command 2 Undefined IP address Check the IP address 3 Target station busy Reduce the frequency of communications 4 Illegal packet bytes Check response processing at the target station 5 Packet bytes exceed the maximum Reduce the send packet size number 6 Local mode error Check that the target station is in the RUN mode 7 Preparing for communications Start communications when the target station is ready 8 Communication failure Cannot access Check the target station 9 Cannot process due to short memory Check the memory space at the target station 10 Illegal received data Check the command 20 Socket initialization error Check parameters for initialization 50 Requested packet byte exceeds the Reduce the requested size maximum number 51 Address error Check the requested memory type 52 Communication failure Cannot access Check the target station 54 Write protected C
166. characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX DFlag 0 1 2 Refer to page 4 29 e Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError 1 Ethernet CED Read Bits from PLC Memory int HKEin_ReadPIcBitMemory int IpOnFlag int DeviceType DWORD addr int BitNo char IpAddr This function is retained until PLC data is transferred from the V7 series e Parameters IpOnFlag Returns the bit status 0 OFF 1 ON DeviceType Address of the device to be read Refer to Chapter 5 Connection to PLCs addr Top memory address to be read For YOKOGAWA or YASKAWA PLCs specify a number 1 for the address addr Example D400 gt 399 D25 24 BitNo Bit number to be read Example 1 When accessing to D20 05 of MITSUBISHI PLC DeviceType 0 addr 20 BitNo 5 Example 2 When accessing to M20 of MITSUBISHI PLC 20 16 1 4 DeviceType 6 addr 1 BitNo 4 IpAddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError Read Bits from Internal Memory int HKEtn_ReadinternalBitMemory int IpOnFlag int DeviceType DWORD addr int BitNo char IpAddr This function is retained until data is transferred from the V7 series e Parameters IpOnFlag Returns the bit status 0 OFF 1 ON Device Type 0 u 1 s addr Top memory address to be read BitNo Bit number
167. cond PLC to the MJ port e With the PLC2Way function it is possible to communicate with PLCs without special program in the same way as 1 1 connection Two PLCs that are connected to the V7 series are controlled at the same time and memory read write operations are available with these two PLCs e Connection at the MJ port can be performed via RS 232C or RS 485 2 wire With RS 232C one PLC can be connected with RS 485 a maximum of 31 PLCs can be connected RS 232C RS 422 RS 485 MJ2 1 lie PLC RS 422 RS 485 2 wire connection PLC1 PLC2 PLCn n 1 to 31 uo uo bota al e Constant reading sampling of PLC data connected to the MJ port When read write memory addresses are preset on the temperature control network PLC2Way table background data transfer is performed at regular intervals It is also possible to save the read data in the V7 internal buffer SRAM or CF card m oO D O 3 3 Cc gt O O mn ED pco e Data transfer between PLCs The PLC memory data can be transferred to another PLC in blocks using a macro command Connection at the CN1 connector is described in 1 1 1 Connection to 4 n 1 Connection Multi link Hereunder the PLC connection at the MJ port and settings required for PLC2Way connection are described Limitations on Connection at the MJ Port Ther
168. contact e o 19 LG PLC 5 111 GLOFA CNET Memory TYPE Remarks M internal memory 0 MW as word device Q output 1 QW as word device l input 2 IW as word device Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin male RXD 2 TXD 3 GND 5 O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC Use shielded twist pair cables 19 LG PLC Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 PLC D sub 25 pin male D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 4 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 6 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male 1 pa ERAN E PLC 7 Eo SG I 4 1 1 12 RDA i I 1 13 RDB l l I I 25 r SDB Use shielded twist pair cables 20 FANUC PLC 20 FANUC PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection Power Mate Model H D Port on the CPU RS 422 Wiring Diagram 2 unit JD14 Power Mats Power Mate i Model
169. coo ii ida 5 51 10 11 12 13 14 15 Toyopuc PLE iia ds 5 55 Avallable PLES 0 a A AAA AAA 5 55 COMMUNICATION Setting viciado a 5 55 SWICK SOU sic coat td ii ai fost A dci 5 55 Available MENO Vuitton db lit 5 56 Screen Editing Memory Input coccoccnncnnnonannonannnonannconononnnnoncnrnonannnonarncononronncnnca canon cnnncanaanone 5 56 WI AAA AA een Odea 3 te 5 57 RORI EA E tt a o e a a Ee ace notch eA Ee 5 58 Aral PLCS each teat deed dls near eutenedvecdinea aerettneianevecasssidvalesgusesberaa tras tlvanencneseese 5 58 Communication SettinQ o onnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnnnnnoncnonnnannn ana canan cnn canon nro 5 58 MICREX F Series FLEX PC Series Switch Setting ooococonnncconnncccnnoccccnnncccnonacanonanrnnonancnnnnnnno 5 59 NA O 5 60 KOYO Pl iii died ia dd idad Available PLCs Communication Setting sisia ied i oee edna siii Available Memory sarna i Aaria N e N aia Switch SON A ce ee eet neice WIN Qiies ee Gaeta iectiedeligivscadtiscivdiedeetestacvssddedAagaivieedidieteeanuitesei E hielo ds Allen Bradley PG rusia italia Aa EO REESE Available PES canica Communication Setting ii ba Available Memory Soi Aia PLG 5 Series Switch Setting ii ca Ai eel SLC500 Series Micro Logix 100 Transmission Parameter Setting A A Sa ee TOSHIBA MACHINE PLO c cccesseceeeeceeeeneeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeecaeeeseaeeeesneesscaeeseseeetenseeess Available PLC Sisirin i a ds Communication Se
170. creen Used for checking the 10BASE T interface Normal Connect Error Disconnect 1 Network Table Register IP addresses and other information for the V series PLCs or computers that should be included for Ethernet communications on the V SFT editor System Setting gt Network Table Setting gt Ethernet gt Edit Network Table The registered network table can be used or not used depending on the Not Use Network Table Use Network Table switch 6NetCfgMin Ether Edit Network Table File Edit View Help ajaj ole ejej 2 Edit Network Table Network table Y hostname 1P Address Send Timeout Internal Memory Wrte Memory Card Memory number 192 168 1 58 15 Enabled Enabled 192 168 1 68 15 Enabled Enabled 192 168 1 66 15 Enabled Enabled 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 2 25 Not Use Network Table In the following cases select Not Use Network Table e Screen data is transferred for the first time via Ethernet e The network table is not set for screen data of the V7 series e f the network table is set for screen data of the V7 series but you would like to use an IP address that is different from that set on the network table tentatively press the Use Network Table switch to select Not Use Network Table When the network table is not set or is not used Not Use Network Table It is not used when the gate way or the sub mask i
171. d for the screen For 1 1 connection the V7 series can send an interrupt to the master station through switch activation write command from the keypad and screen change Use CN1 of the V7 series for connection with a general purpose computer Either signal level RS 232C or RS 422 RS 485 can be selected In addition to 1 1 connection 1 n connection is available between the general purpose computer and the V7 series via RS 422 A maximum of 32 V7 series can be connected For 1 n connection interrupts cannot be used General purpose computer RS 42 RS 485 connection 29 CODO V7 series No 1 V7 series No 2 V7 series No 3 V7 series No n n 1 to 32 e For more information refer to the V series Universal Serial Connection Manual 6 V Link V Link 6 V Link 3 21 e V Link is the network where the computer reads from and writes to the internal memory of the V7 series memory card PLC memory or temperature control PLC2 memory using a dedicated protocol Dedicated commands a gt 3 Read Er El a AAN lt gt HI PLC e Use the MJ port of the V7 series for connection with a general purpose compute
172. d to the V7 series In this case the following setting must be made on the Main Menu screen IP address Default gateway Subnet mask Note that this is the tentative setting The port number must be 10000 When the network table is transferred from the V SFT editor the above data is updated e Setting procedure 1 Press the Ethernet switch on the Main Menu screen 2 The Ethernet screen is displayed For more information refer to Chapter 2 MONITOUCH Operations Set the IP address If necessary set the default gateway and subnet mask When attaching the I F unit to V7 set the connecting method 10BASE T AUI as well 3 When the setting has been completed press the Setting Finished switch The Main Menu screen is displayed again 4 The setting data can be reviewed on the Main Menu screen Main Menu v710iTD 2002 4 1 07 23 30 System Information SYSTEM PROG FONT VER 1010 VER 1 300 1 000 1 000 GLISH UF DRV VER 1 310 YOKOGAWA FA M3 Ethernet Screen Data tion Size 5783552 MAC 0050FF000035 Ethernet Information Trans Speed 10BASE T Stat No 192 168 1 68 PORT 10000 MAC 0050FF000035 5 Transfer screen data from the server 1 Ethernet Ez Transferring Screen Data from V SFT Editor 1 Click the
173. de on the V SFT editor Only the points different from those described in 1 1 1 Connection V SFT Setting page 3 3 are explained here PLC Selection Select the PLC that is connected Check that the PLC to be connected is ready for multi link connection Refer to the Appendix e Setting Position System Setting gt PLC Type gt Select PLC Type dialog Communication Parameter Setting e Setting Position System Setting gt Comm Parameter gt Comm Parameter dialog e Setting Items Connection Select Multi Link Click Setting The Multi Link dialog is displayed Make the necessary settings Local Port 1 to 32 Set the port number of the V7 series Set the unique port number for each V7 series If the number duplicates communications will not be performed correctly Send Delay Time 0 to 255 Unit x1 msec Set a time delay in sending the response to the PLC after receipt of data from the PLC Default MONITOUCH setting 20 msec Serd diay time t PLC 4 n 1 Connection Multi ink ESE Total 2 to 32 Set the total number of the V7 series included in the connection Retry Cycle x10 When the V7 series has a problem it is temporarily removed from the communication targets and the master station sends an inquiry for restoration every number of cycles specified for Retry Cycle This setting does not affect the communication speed if no problem is occurring however if the
174. denly in communication test the solution of remark 2 3 Errors Displayed on the V7 Series Error Message Contents Solution Error code received An error code was sent to the link unit by the CPU of the PLC Examine the CPU error code and solve the problem Break The PLC s SD TXD remains at the low level Examine the connection between the PLC s SD TXD and the V7 s RD RXD Invalid memory applicable to MITSUBISHI CPU You specified an address that exceeds the memory range of the PLC that you are linked to Check the type and range of memory that you set Invalid CPU model applicable to MITSUBISHI CPU The PLC currently being supported does not have a corresponding CPU Confirm whether or not the CPU that you are using can be used with the V Series Format The code of the received data is Check 1 2 3 described below invalid Compare Transmission data and received Check 1 2 3 described below applicable to HIDIC S10 data are different NAK A NAK code is received Check 1 2 3 described below applicable to Allen Bradley PLC TNS discrepant Transmitted TNS data and Check 1 2 3 described below applicable to Allen Bradley PLC received TNS data are not in agreement Communication Error An unclear communication error is detected Check 1 2 3 described below Count error applicable to MITSUBISHI CPU Q link unit The expec
175. di SanDisk SDCFB 64 505 64 MB opa PCCF H128MS 128 MB PCCF xxxMS xxx 16 32 48 64 96 128 192 16 to 192 MB Mounting and Dismounting the CF Card 1 The CF card interface is provided on the side of the unit For V708 V708i For V710 V710i V712 V712i Side View Side View 2 Insert the card securely into the interface with the card backside outwards viewed from the rear of the unit as shown below When the card is inserted the eject button pops out Card backside 3 To remove the card press the eject button The card pops out ED 4 CF Card CF A Notes on Handling the CF Card 1 Do not insert or remove the CF card during access Doing so may destroy data on the CF card The CF card can be inserted or removed safely when the Main Menu screen is displayed However if the Card Menu switch is pressed on the Main Menu screen and the CF card operation screen is displayed it is not possible to insert or remove the CF card Before mounting or removing the CF card be sure to check that the CF card is not being accessed 2 Do not turn the power off or on during access to the CF card 3 Make a backup copy of the CF card at regular intervals 4 If a disk error occurs and data read write operation is disabled perform a scan disk on Windows and try to restore the disk If not restored initialize the CF card For information on scan disk and Windows operations refer to the manual for Win
176. dows 5 The number of writing times per CF card is limited approx 300 000 times Consequently frequent writing at short intervals may shorten service life of the CF card To use the CF card for saving sampling data check the setting for sampling time Also avoid repeated writing using a CYCLE macro command 15 Printer Connection PRINTER 1 37 15 Printer Connection PRINTER When the V7 series is connected to a printer a screen hard copy data sheet or sampling data can be printed To connect a printer with parallel interface insert the cable into the printer connector PRINTER to connect a printer with serial interface insert the cable into a modular jack MJ1 MJ2 CAUTION Be sure to turn the printer off when the V7 unit is turned off Printer Connector PRINTER e This is the printer connector for parallel interface For V708 V708i Bottom View For V710 V710i V712 V712i Bottom View O y Ol e The printer interface pins correspond to signals as given below PRINTER half pitch 20 pin Pin No Signal Name Contents 1 STB Strobe 2 PDO Data 0 3 PD1 Data 1 4 PD2 Data 2 5 PD3 Data 3 6 PD4 Data 4 7 PD5 Data 5 8 PD6 Data 6 9 PD7 Data 7 10 GND 11 BUSY Busy 12 GND 13 SELECT 14 INTP INP PROME 15 PFAT FAULT 16 GND 17 GND 18 P 5V PRN 5 19 GND 20 GND
177. e are some limitations on the connection at the MJ port 1 It is not possible to make a selection for Code and Text Processing in the communication parameter setting Code Fixed to DEC or BCD appropriate for the PLC Text Processing Fixed to LSB gt MSB 2 Even if a communication error occurs it is not possible to stop communications Only error codes are stored in s730 to 763 for each station 3 Multi link 2 connection is not available 4 RS 232C or RS 485 485 2 wire connection must be used The PLC that allows RS 422 4 wire connection only cannot be connected directly PLCs Compatible with PLC2Way Connection at MJ Port e When connecting the V7 series to the PLC at the MJ port using PLC2Way function use the RS232C or RS 485 RS 422 2 wire connection The PLC that allows RS 485 RS 422 4 wire connection only cannot be connected directly e PLCs compatible with PLC2Way connection at MJ port as of April 1 2002 are shown below MITSUBISHI OMRON SHARP YOKOGAWA FUJI ELECTRIC For the applicable PLCs refer to the PLC2Way column in Available PLCs in Chapter 5 Connection to PLCs O Connectable x Not connectable e The communication parameter setting and available memory for the PLC connected at the MJ port for PLC2Way connection are the same as those for 1 1 connection Refer to the communication parameter setting and the available memory for each manufacturer in Chapter 5 Connection to P
178. e cotrol Temperature cotrol PLC memory within 16 bits PLC memory over 16 bits Par gt 5 3 23 3 215 S ES ARAE AE 348321281378 ziala 18 32 z 8 8 2 ajalgi Sa gs 3335 3 8 9 S 3 53 az cas elg 6219585 8 9 88 gels ajaj 3 2135 118 o 3 3 o p3 2 3 2 2 4 10 2 2 4 2 2 2 4 2 2 8 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 Bytes Reads the 2 word data ABCD starting with the address u0020 0014H on the V7 of the station number 1 Command S E S C L T WV Read Number T U X local command of words Model Type Address Reserved for system X M IRIE No to read p COTH J 20H O2H gt OOH 00H DOTAH 00000000008 BEH 024 304314 32H30H 304324 30H30H 30H30H 30H30H31H34H 30H30H30H30H30H30H30H30H30H30H 03H 38H46H ODH OAH Response S A Data E S C L ee T v7 Cc T U Normal communication X local K 7 E D XIM IRIE No 41H 42H 43H 44H 014 oon t i A EA som 024 3043H 304304 3431H 344324 344334 34434 OSH 36430 ODH OAH ES Ce V Link Write with sum check and CR LF Write Command Command S V7 i Number Write target L T local eee of words memory X No to write setting F 1 2 2
179. e signal 4 NC Not used 5 NC Not used 6 RX Ethernet receive signal 7 NC Not used 8 NC Not used IL fe Q w D ie O D Q gt O 0 O n 13 10BASE T LAN Notes on Wiring CAUTION When using the LAN port keep the LAN cable away from the power supply cable as much as possible UTP cable Straight PLC Ethernet unit Distance between the node and the HUB Maximum network nodes Cable Connection Diagram Straight cable with HUB 10BASE T RJ 45 8Pin 10BASE T RJ 45 8Pin dE oJ N OJJ N F E Unshielded twist pair cable 2 01 a 0 1 a Notes on Cables Use the following recommended cable Recommended cable 10BASE T Type Twist pair cable category 5 UTP cable Straight or cross cable For more information refer the HUB specifications 100 m maximum 100 sets Cross cable without HUB 10BASE T RJ 45 8Pin 10BASE T RJ 45 8Pin OD wy N afojsjoajn 0o w J ae Unshielded twist pair cable 0 0 a 14 CF Card CF 1 35 14 CF Card CF Recommended CF Card a D CF cards in compliance with CompactFlash M can be used The following card is xa recommended Manufacturer Type Capacity 8 TDK TC032HS 32 MB el Kodak KPCN 32 32 MB
180. e transfer C Ex Font I Transfer through Ethemet c 192168 1 39 SRAM Dee Station No Table C Ladder comm pra Modbus comm pra PARA I MODEM Transfer PC gt PE lt PE Info Up date of System Detail Setting When the Main Menu screen is displayed after transferring screen data the Extension switch appears If the Extension switch does not appear transfer font data Pressing the switch brings up the Extension Program Info screen where the temperature control PLC2Way driver setting and temperature control network PLC2way setting can be reviewed For more information refer to Chapter 2 MONITOUCH Operations System Memory List 7 PLC2Way The status of the PLC connected at the MJ port for PLC2Way communications is output to the system memory s of the V7 series The memory addresses s730 to 763 of the PLC connected at the MJ port are explained Address Contents s730 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 00 status 731 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 01 status 732 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 02 status 733 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 03 status 734 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 04 status 735 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 05 status 736 Temperature controller PLC2Way Station No 06 status 737 Temperature
181. ead Office 209 2 Koh Mameda honmachi Kanazawa shi Ishikawa 920 0047 Japan PRICE Y1 000 2010NEO 20903000
182. ed adan Available PECES Iii id Communication Setting 25 26 27 28 29 TAIAN PEG ii di ean 5 124 Available PLCS ii daa a AA 5 124 Communication Setting vivia Ad elie ede a 5 124 Available Memory iii ded ein ih eee cia sneha ene 5 124 WING ctra MOELLER PLC Available PLG Siamini A AA AAA A 5 128 Gommiinication Setting xiii A wd AAA da 5 128 Available Memory ES WING ies eaten Aah a ii Telemecanique PLC Available PREGS oia oe wd ae eet ea ee ee Hardware Specifications Features Models and Peripheral Equipment System Composition Specifications Dimensions and Panel Cut out Names and Functions of Components Mounting Procedure E E Na Power Supply Cable Connection 9 Coin type Lithium Battery 10 DIP Switch Setting 11 Serial Connector CN1 12 Modular Jack MJ1 MJ2 13 10BASE T LAN 14 CF Card CF 15 Printer Connection PRINTER 1 Features 1 1 1 Features The V7 series inherits and heightens the features of the V6 series as described below 1 32k color Display 32 768 color display makes colorful expression possible Bitmap files are clearly displayed in brilliant colors 2 CF Card Interface as Standard The CF card can be used for saving multiple screen data sampling data recipe data hard copy images and other various usages Large sized video capture images JPEG or WAV files can be saved I D 5 a D 5 o Mm D Q o E o
183. en completed the message Format Completed is displayed 6 Extension Program Information When the Extension switch on the Main Menu screen is pressed the following Extension Program Info screen appears The driver setting and parameter setting for temperature controller PLC2Way communication ladder transfer function Modbus slave communication etc are displayed Extension Program Info Main Menu Temp PLC2Way Control Drv VER 1 100 RKC SR Mini CB Temp Control PLC2Way Comm Parameter Signal Level RS485 Baud Rate 9600 Data Length Stop Bit Parity None Retry Time 3 Time out 100 msec Send Delay 0 msec Return Time 10 sec O SYSTEM E e POWER 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu D 7 Extended Function Setting When the Editor MJ1 switch on the Main Menu screen is pressed the following Extended Function Setting screen appears Set the baud rate to be used when transferring screen data between the V7 series and a modem 1 Select the desired baud rate using the 1 Y switch and press the Setting Finished switch Setting range 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 The function switches and switches on the Main Menu screen are not valid for 15 seconds after the Setting Finished switch is pressed When the Setting Finished switch is pressed an AT command is automatically sent to the modem and the baud rate used betwe
184. en the V7 series and the modem is set 2 The Main Menu screen is displayed automatically and Modem Connect Mode is displayed below the Editor MJ1 switch 3 To transfer screen data without a modem select Not used for Modem Comm Baud Rate To transfer screen data by connecting the V7 series and the computer via V6 CP select Not used for Modem Comm Baud Rate ua s Speeu 1uDmSr Stat No 192 168 PORT 10000 MAC 050FF000035 Extended Function Setting Main Menu Up Down Setting Value Er POWER U Modem Comm Baud Rate Not used Pp F2 Down Pressing the Editor MJ1 switch brings up the Extended Function Setting screen Setting Finished kd Pressing the Setting Finished switch moves back to the Main Menu screen Baud Rate 115200 Ethernet Information Trans Speed 10BASE _ PORT 10000 MAC 0050FF000035 Modem Connect Mode O Z 4 O E O I O O g gt 0 2 30 2 Function Switches 2 Function Switches Types e There are eight function switches provided SYSTEM F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 SYSTEM Switch The SYSTEM switch works in alternate operations When this switch is pressed once the switch menu is displayed at the side of the function switches F1 to F5 and each
185. er an affiliated organization of the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry has standardized It is possible to connect FA controllers and computers such as programmable controllers PLCs or NC controllers CNCs of different manufacturers as shown below for control and monitoring SERVER Computer Computer Computer EWS A Computer o gt WAN A I I E I I EU L a Host LAN Ethernet TCP IP UDP IP FL net Ethernet based control network PLC PLC PLC V7 CNC RC E gl P A 8g HE Controller OD i O ll 9 00 0 ES 5h O i ofa Field network F O Devices gt O Sensor actuator O e To use FL net OPCN 2 communications on the V7 series the communication interface unit CU 03 must be mounted When the V7 series is equipped with the communication interface unit CU 03 it becomes an FL net OPCN 2 ready device e When CU 03 is mounted for FL net OPCN 2 communications on V7i the 10BASE T connector LAN provided on the unit cannot be used Consequently it is not possible to use FL net OPCN
186. er contact 9 Read only 3 CU counter contact 10 Read only S aj 3 SYSMAC CV Mo 9 Memory TYPE Remarks DM data memory 0 CH input output relay 1 AR alarm relay 4 T timer current value 5 C counter current value 6 1 EMn extensional data memory 7 Read only TU timer contact 9 Read only CU counter contact 10 SYSMAC CS1 SYSMAC CS1 DNA Memory TYPE Remarks DM data memory 0 CH input output relay 1 H holding relay 2 A alarm relay 4 T timer current value 5 Cc counter current value 6 EMn extensional data memory 7 1 WwW internal relay 8 TU timer contact 9 Read only CU counter contact 10 Read only ED 2 0ouroweic 1 When using EMn extended data memory specify the Example EMO 30000 bank number CV 0 to 7 CS1 0 to C The assigned AA memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown E Address on the right Colon Bank number Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC 1 Ra Ta D sub 9 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 2 OMRON PLC 5 27 Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin male
187. eries For more information refer to Chapter 2 MONITOUCH Operations Communication Interface Unit CU 03 Specifications of Communication Interface Unit CU 03 Specifications Item AUI 10BASE T 10BASE5 10BASE2 Baud rate 10 Mbps Transmission method Base band Maximum network distance or maximum node interval 2500 m 5 segments 925 m 5 segments 500 m 4 HUBs Maxim r ment 100 m a sogme 500 m 185 m Between the node and the 9 HUB Maximum number of 100 segment 30 segment 2 segment nodes Minimum node interval 2 5m 0 5m None UTP Connecting cable Ethernet coaxial cable 50 Q RG58A U RG58C U coaxial cable 50 Q unshielded twisted pair 22 26AWG Z 2 Q O o 3 3 Z gt O a 5 D WED Ethernet Nomenclature and Functions of Ethernet I F Unit CU 03 O Te CASE 1 2 3 ADR LOW HI FUSE OV 10B T RX TX LNK Cl 60018 o OS Hes oy 5 E 8 O AU 12V 4 5 1 LED Indicates the status of the communication Name Contents On Off RX Data receive status Currently receiving Not receiving TX Data send status Currently sending Not sending LNK Link status for 10BASE T only Normal Error Cl Collision Data collision Normal 2 Port number setting switches Set the port number of V7 specified on the network table using the following rotary
188. es on Communication Errors e Be sure to select the PLC memory either for Read Area or Calendar in the Comm Parameter dialog e Processing for PLC failure When a communication error or timeout has been detected during communications with a PLC no further communication with this PLC is attempted until the display screen changes The information of PLC failure is stored in the V7 internal system memory address s114 to 129 Supplemental Information Internal system memory The internal system memory is the one for the V7 series system e Inthe case that the internal memory is set for Read Area Write Area and Calendar no initial connection check is performed and calendar information is read when the V7 series establishes communications with the PLC for the first time A communication error occurs on the V7 series if a timeout is detected while accessing the PLC 3 3 n 1 Connection Multi link 2 n 1 Connection Multi link 2 Multi link 2 One PLC is connected to a maximum of four V7 series An original network is created where the V7 series Local Port 1 that is directly connected to the PLC is the master station and other three V7 series are slave stations Only the master station makes communications directly with the PLC and the slave stations make communications with the PLC via the master station V7 master station V7 slave station V7 slave station V7 slave station
189. esistance Terminating resistance Terminating resistance erminating resistance OFF When no jumper is required on the PLC To the PLC s RS422 port of the TC485 TC485 n TC485 A f Signal Shield Signal Shield Signal Shield link unit Name Mi tai Name Name i Stee A Fe ff PA FG i FG peo jA KA SD F SD i SD I i F i gt Send data SD i SD i SD i J gt Send data RD tt if RD H RD hod pod RD L RD Hod p D L E SG sG To oF se gt se Terminating resistance Terminating resistance Terminating resistance Terminating resistance ON OFF OFF ON e When TC485 is not used Install jumpers between RD SD and RD SD 3 18 4 n 1 Connection Multi link When connecting directly to the CPU of the MITSUBISHI QnA series V MDD V7 TC485 V7 TC485 V7 TC485 GD port Signal Signal Signal Name Name Pin No Name FG Fo l b 7 1 SD SD it 2 RxD SD SD 3 TxD RD RD 4 DSR RD RD 5 DTR SG SG 7 SG a a 7 a RD terminating RD terminating RD terminating 15 RxD resistance resistance resistance poa NA 16 TxD ON OFF OFF i i T pod t 17 DSR Use shielded twist pair cables i a 18 DTR 20 Miudeusseeiudenw 21 Use the GD port of Hakko Electronics optional dual port interface V MDD V SFT Setting The following settings must be ma
190. ess set on the V7 screen may not exist on the PLC memory over Check the setting O Z 4 O Cc O I O O e gt Mm 2 Check 3 Errors Displayed on the V7 Series Error Message Contents Solution Screen No Error There is no setting for the received screen At the start of communications the V7 series regards the value in the read area n 2 as the screen number Check that this value is an existing screen number on the PLC Data has some error Error XX XX XXX There is an error in the created screen data Error XX XX XXX indicates the edited screen and the contents of the error For the error details and solutions refer to Reference Manual and correct screen data Screen No Error xt o o a Communication Error Check I F driver A gt heck Error Message Contents Solution Communication Error Check I F driver Although a request to send is given to the computer no answer is returned within the specified time The I F driver for simulator is transferred If you don t use the simulator uncheck Use Simulator before transferring data 3 Warning An error may be displayed on the Main Menu screen during data transfer This is a warning message For the warning details and solutions refer to the Reference Manual and correct screen data Main Menu V710iT 2
191. ette Extension print circuit board to back up the memory for sampling data V7 internal memory and memo pad The capacity of an SRAM cassette is 512 kbyte TC485 terminal converter Used for connection between the V7 series and a PLC at the RS 422 485 terminal block CREC card recorder The card recorder creates a backup copy of screen data or works as an external memory storage system for memory manager and data logging functions REC MCARD memory card compliant with JEIDA ver 4 0 Used with the card recorder when having a backup copy of screen data or saving data on an external medium for memory manager and data logging functions SRAM 256 k 512 k 1 M 2 M 4 Mbyte FLASH ROM 256 k 512 k 1 M 2 M 4 M 16 Mbyte 2 Models and Peripheral Equipment 1 5 M CARD SFTE memory card editor Application software for editing data stored on a memory card Windows98 NT4 0 Me 2000 XP compatible V MDD ACPU QnACPU FXCPU dual port interface Add on connector with two ports specifically designed for the connector on the MITSUBISHI s ACPU QnACPU FXCPU programmer Operability can be improved when directly connecting the V7 series to the ACPU QnACPU FXCPU programmer E D o D oO Mm O D Q oh o S n o D V I O serial extension I O Used as an external I O unit for PLC It has 16 inputs and 16 outputs CU xx xx 00 gt OPCN 1 01 gt T LINK
192. etween the V7 series and the PLC that is used for communications with the V7 series Hakko Electronics QCPU2 Soll GPPW ax MITSUBISHI s RS 232C connecting cable QC30R2 Computer PC E 0 connector MITSUBISHI QnH series V7 V7 series Connecting cable QCPU2 When using the ladder transfer function by connecting the computer PLC programming software to the V7 series it is possible to write ladder programs or monitor the PLC memory using the V7 series GPPW Sal V SFT MITSUBISHI QnH series al Computer PC V7 series Communications between the computer and the PLC Communications between V7 a and the PLC j Applicable PLCs MITSUBISHI PLCs Q02 Q02H Q06HCPU port Q mode 1 MITSUBISHIPLC MEX Connection e Use Hakko Electronics QACPU2 cable when connecting the V7 series CN1 to the PLC RS 232C port e Use Hakko Electronics V6 CP cable when connecting the computer PLC programming software and the V7 series MJ1 2 V6 CP AN GPPW V SFT BI el el el el el el el el E a Computer PC V6 CP V7 series MITSUBISHI Qn
193. female Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 5 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male HMI Adapter PC Adapter D sub 9 pin female VEA ee a da Use shielded twist pair cables RS 422 Wiring Diagram 6 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 15 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 15 SIEMENS PLC 5 97 Wiring Diagram 7 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC FG 4 e gt D sub 9 pin male SG 7 as Use shielded twist pair cables Terminating Resistance Setting Set the DIP switch 7 and 8 of the V7 series to the OFF position Connect terminating resistance to the serial connector CN1 of the V7 series as shown below If the terminating resistance is not connected a communication error may occur V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 Wiring Diagram 8 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC Pont FEN D sub 9 pin male non ON ae GND 6 I 1 1 1 Dl 5 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 4 E i i DI 8 1 I 1 1 TT ne DO 1 1 1 1 1 1 rw wu Do 7 Use shielded twist pair cables 16 SHINKO PLC 16 SHINKO PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection SELMART SELMART 100 and later Version O1M2 UCI 6 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1
194. fixed Select TYPE 1 or TYPE 2 for Trans Mode in the Comm Parameter dialog of the V SFT editor PLC Model V7 Setting Contents GL60 series PROGIC 8 TYPE 1 Special binary code GL120 130 series TYPE 2 Standard binary code 7 YASKAWA PLC 5 51 CP9200SH MP900 Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 1 1 Parity Even Even a Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Error check CRC fixed Port delay timer O fixed Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memobus Memory TYPE Remarks 4 word device 0 3 input register 1 Including constant register read only R link register 2 A extension register 3 0 coil 4 D link coil 5 1 input relay 6 Read only 7 constant register 7 CP9200SH MP900 Memory TYPE Remarks MW holding register 0 IW input register 1 Read only MB coil 4 IB input relay 6 Read only When setting the MB IB memory set the bit numbers in the hexadecimal notation MBxxxxx DEC Bit No HEX O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a ED 7 Vaskawa ric Wiring Wiring diagrams wit
195. g resistance at pins 24 and 25 MJ1 modular jack 1 terminating resistance 7 PLC2Way 3 35 V SFT Setting System Setting PLC model selection and parameter setting to be made on the V SFT editor for the PLC2Way connection at the MJ port are explained Temp CTRL PLC2Way Setting Select the PLC model and make the parameter setting as described below 1 Select System Setting gt Temp CTRL PLC2Way Setting gt Temp CTRL PLC2Way Comm Setting The Temp Control PLC2Way Comm Setting dialog is displayed System Setting Tool Window PLC Type Comm Parameter Edit Model Selection Unit Setting Font Setting Modular Function Switch Setting Buffering Area Setting Memory Card Setting GF Card Setting Maken YOROGAWS 07250 Seta Printer Setting Baud Rate S600BPS z Party Even 12 Video Setting Sound Setting F Sum check Barcode Setting V Link Setting r Signal Level Macro Setting oth pb 4 R5232 RS 485 Time Display Format SRAM Clock Setting TimeGutTime fi a o pomet ibit abit Attribute Table Sa DE TINE m 4 MR400 Format Table Ee meso Data Length Fletuin Time e He C Tbt G Sbit Default Cancel Temp Control PLC2Way Comm Seti m oO D O 3 3 Cc gt O O mn 2 Check Use Temp Control Network PLC2Way Communication IV Use Temp Control Network PLC2Way
196. g to the CPU of MITSUBISHI FX1 2 series Use the MDD CPU cable optional for connection Slide switch ak 1 Aseries 2 QnA series 3 FX series When connecting to the CPU of MITSUBISHI FX2N 1N ON 1S series Use MITSUBISHI s conversion cable FX 20P CADP yA MB CPUQ cable optional Set the slide switch before turning the power on 665686 6 0 rs gag eg S eg E V7 V MDD cannot be used with the MI4 FX cable O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a e The power to the V MDD is supplied from the CPU Check the electric capacity of 5 V at the CPU Current consumption max 350 mA e Keep the cable between the CPU and V MDD as short as possible Max 1 to 1 5 m e Be sure to consider noise problems when performing wiring e When V MDD is used for connection with the V7 series set 1 5 seconds or above for the timeout time in the Comm Parameter dialog Please read the instruction manual for V MDD before use 5 18 1 MITSUBISHI PLC Ladder Transfer Function Up until now it was necessary to debug the data by removing and mounting two cables repeatedly as shown below when the V7 series is directly connected to MITSUBISHI s QnHCPU equipped with only one RS 232C port e RS232C cable between the computer and the PLC that is used for monitoring data in the PLC or writing ladder programs MITSUBISHI s QC30R2 e The cable b
197. gh performance Personal computer PC Ethernet V series i i s During operation Panel Editor Transferring Link communication l screen data RS 232C RS 422 J Creating screens V6 CP gt V SFT Personal computer PC V7i high performance Link unit During operation Universal serial communication RS 232C RS 422 Transferring screen data Transferring recipe data Saving sampling data etc CF card A General purpose computer Transferring screen data Transferring other data Transferring screen data V6 CP Memory manager Data logging function CREC cable Temperature controller Card recorder inverter CREC Printer cable Sound output Cable V6 BCD Video camera Video input Personal Display Barcode reader computer RGB output RGB input 1 The option unit EU xx is required 4 Specifications a 4 Specifications I a se a General Specifications S 02 Model V708 V710 v712 g O Item DC power supply AC power supply DC power supply AC power supply DC power supply O Rated Voltage 24 VDC 100 240 VAC 24 VDC 100 240 VAC 24 VDC v Permissible Range 100 240 VAC 100 240 VAC Q of Voltage 24 VDC 10 10 24 VDC 10 10 24 VDC 10
198. gt O O mn 3 12 3 N 1 Connection Multi link 2 e The V7 and V6 series can be used together The V6 series can be the master station However when V606 V606i is the master station the slave station must be V606 V606i Also depending on the hardware version of the V6 series multi link 2 connection may not be supported Refer to the V6 Hardware Specifications Wiring Connection Terminal block PLC Communications between V7 series RS 485 2 wire maximum length 500 m Lp c d e CN1 MJ2 CN1 CN1 CN1 V7 master station V7 slave station V7 slave station V7 slave station Local Port 1 Local Port 2 Local Port 3 Local Port 4 d e Connection between PLC lt gt V7 master station The communication parameter setting and connecting method are the same as those for 1 1 connection Refer to Chapter 5 Connection to PLCs Connection between V7 series master station lt gt V7 slave station The connecting port for the V7 series master station depends on the selection for Multi Link either Modular Jack 1 or Modular Jack 2 on the V SFT editor Selection of Modular Jack 2 is recommended Editor Port is set as default for Modular Jack 1 The connecting port of the V7 series slave station should be CN1 It is recommended that CN1 be equipped with a terminal converter TC485 set to 2
199. h modular plug Brown 5V Red 0V Orange RXD Yellow TXD e Notes on Connection In the case of barcode readers with CTS and RTS control it may be necessary to install a jumper to RTS and CTS Otherwise the barcode reader may not work correctly The external power supply 5 V is max 150 mA Refer to page 1 29 e When using the barcode reader that was connected to V4 MONITOUCH s old version connect it to the D sub 9 pin female connector using the V6 BCD cable as shown below 12345678 Barcode reader D sub 9 pin female Install a jumper between CTS and RTS 13 10BASE T LAN The connector for 1OBASE T is provided as standard on V7i high performance To connect Ethernet with V7 standard use the communication unit CU 03 If CU 03 is attached to V7i it has priority over the built in 10BASE T 10BASE T cannot be used 10BASE T Connector e Use this connector for Ethernet connection For V708i For V710i V712i Side View Bottom View o Ol 000 o 00 000000 o HH mn ama CAUTION MJ1 2 and LAN connector are 8 pin modular jacks Check the name plate and insert the connector in the correct position e The LAN 10BASE T pins correspond to signals as given below LAN Pin No Signal Name Contents 1 TX Ethernet send signal ioaAs678 2 TX Ethernet send signal 3 RX Ethernet receiv
200. h the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin male 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male A pin male Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 7 YASKAWA PLC CP217IF CN1 2171F CN1 2 D sub 9 pin male SD RD RS DR SG Use shielded twist pair cables D sub 25 pin male RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 V7 CN1 FG 1 a i pa sD 2 1 1 l 1 RD 3 t pl __ 1 I E E m l 1 cs 5 End a Lp 1 j 1 1 sc 7 o I a va Fal aa nE Y Use shielded twist pair cables D sub 25 pin male 2 3 4 CS 5 6 7 9 CD CP217IF CN2 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 7 YASKAWA PLC Wiring Diagram 6 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin male 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 7 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male CP217IF CN3 FG 1 7 a MR 8 male E p SD 12 m pas eS 1 1 SD 13 E coo 1 I 1 Eaa a RD 25 a Far Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 8 V7 CN1
201. han 0 temperature control network PLC2Way transfer macro forced execution op oO D O 3 3 Cc gt O 2 3 N END pco Details e s730 761 The following status code for the PLC connected at the MJ port is stored Code Contents 0000H Normal FFFFH Timeout 8001H Check code error 8002H Data error 800BH Error code received from the PLC connected at the MJ port Errors other than the above are stored as shown below MSB LSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 1 0 ooo 0 0 Buffer full error Parity error Overrun error L Framing error Break detection L Error 0 Bits O to 14 are all 0 1 Any bit 0 to 14 is not 0 Error Details Solution Timeout Although a request to send is given to the Check 1 2 3 described below PLC connected at the MJ port no answer is returned within the specified time Check code error The check code in the PLC connected at the MJ port response was not correct Check 1 3 described below Data error The code of the received data is invalid Check 1 2 3 described below Error code An error occurs at the PLC connected at the Refer to the instruction manual for the PLC received MJ port Buffer full The V7 buffer is full Contact your local distributor Parity An error occurred in parity check Check 2 3 described belo
202. han 2 mm for grounding e Set the grounding point near the MONITOUCH to shorten the distance of grounding cables e When the unit is grounded along with other machines or is grounded to a part of a building it may be adversely affected e f any input output error occurs due to the grounding detach the FG terminal from the ground When the V7 unit is attached to the mounting panel the fixtures and frame grounds FG are connected To detach the FG terminal from the ground attach the insulating sheet to the fixtures and the mounting panel for insulation e An independent earth pole must be used for MONITOUCH e Use a cable which has a nominal cross section of more 9 Coin type Lithium Battery 9 Coin type Lithium Battery NCAUTION Be sure to set the battery when using the calendar function or the SRAM cassette Without a battery the contents in the SRAM or calendar data will not be retained Battery Mounting Procedure Electric shock hazard DANGER D Steps 2 to 5 must be performed while the power is not supplied to the V7 unit 1 A coin type lithium battery is attached to the battery holder without connection in the backside of the unit before delivery 2 Turn the unit off Open the battery holder cover To open the cover press the end of the cover in the direction of the arrow as shown in the left illustration below
203. he following connections at modular jack 1 2 set DIPSW 6 DIPSW8 to the ON position Master station for multi link 2 connection Temperature controller network PLC2Way connection via RS 485 Connection with the card recorder CREC optional Connection with the serial extension I O V I O optional Connection to the V7 unit at the termination of V link connection via RS 485 10 DIP Switch Setting CF Auto Load DIPSW1 A screen data file saved on a CF card can be auto loaded as described below 1 Transfer screen data from the computer to a CF card Refer to the Reference Manual for more information 2 Set DIPSW1 in the ON position and insert the CF card that contains the screen data file 3 Turn the V7 unit on The screen data is automatically loaded into the FLASH memory of the unit I D 5 a D 5 o Mm D Q o E on o gt a 1 28 11 Serial Connector CN1 11 Serial Connector CN1 Serial Connector for PLC Connection 1 To communicate with the PLC RS 232C RS 422 485 connect the cable to the serial connector CN1 at the bottom of the V7 unit For V708 V708i For V710 V710i V712 V712i Bottom View Bottom View o 00 000 00 000000 o y O aR 0 3 lt p 2 The serial connector pins correspond to signals as given below
204. he touch switch adjustment screen When S the finger is released a beep sounds and the position is set 2 flashes 3 Press on 2 that is flashing at the corner Touch the fickering comer The last position you touched is the setting value When the finger is released a beep sounds J and the position is set 3 flashes 4 Press on 3 that is flashing at the corner When the finger is released a beep sounds and the position is set 4 flashes D Es Touch Switch Adjustment 5 Press on 4 that is flashing at the corner When the finger is released a beep sounds and the position is set 1 W 1 Touch Switch Adjustment 6 To re set the positions press the F2 switch and follow step 2 and later 7 Press the F1 switch A long beep I Touch Switch Adjustment sounds and the positions are determined The touch switch test screen is displayed again X 986 Y 984 Touch the flickering corner The last position you touched is the setting value 8 To cancel the setting press the F3 switch The touch switch test screen is displayed again 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu Card Menu Screen When the Card Menu switch on the Main Menu screen is pressed the following Card Menu screen appears This screen is used
205. heck write protection of the card 55 Cannot process due to short memory Check the memory space at the target station 56 Sampling buffer error Check the command 100 Processing another command Continue retrying 101 Command control Buffer over Reduce the frequency of communications 120 Communications aborted by the user Communications are forcedly aborted 121 Received during command processing Reduce the frequency of communications Z o 2 Q x O o 3 3 Cc gt O a 5 n ED it Ethernet Server Communication Procedure Data Request from V7 to Server 1 Execute the receive wait thread using int HKEtn_RecvFrom on the application of the server 2 Send the command from the V7 series to the server using macro command SEND 3 The server analyzes the command and takes the appropriate action User data format Transfer from the V7 series Server El V7 series gi Item Bytes Packet bytes 2 2 2 1 n bytes Transaction No 2 Command 0x33 1 User data n PLC Data Request from Server to V7 1 A request is sent from the application of the server to the V7 series Use int HKEtn_ReadPlcMemory for a memory request 2 3 The V7 series reads the PLC memory 4 The V7 series returns data read from the PLC memory to the server
206. hernet ANTE Ethernet Information Trans Speed 10BASE T Stat No 192 168 1 68 PORT 10000 MAC 0050FF000035 E Screen Data PLC Type VOKOGAWAFANIFAMIREEbame information onment Size 5783552 Error Stop Time Out 0 50 soc tty 3 t The error number is displayed here 1 Ethernet e System memory s518 No Contents Solution 0 Normal 200 Failed in send request Check cable connection and network table setting of the target station Check that the setting on the target station is 201 Send error consistent with the network table setting The communication unit is in the older version or is 202 Internal port error faulty The number of connections reaches the maximum 204 TCP connection over and no more connection is possible Check the communication lines 205 TCP connection error Connection cannot be established Check the communication lines or turn the power off and on TCP communication disconnection has failed Check 206 TCP connection end error that the communication partner with the V7 series is present on the line 207 TCP send error TCP sending has failed Check the communication lines 350 Send buffer full The line is busy Consult the network
207. ilable PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection T series T series Computer link port on CPU RS 422 Wiring Diagram 1 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows ltem Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 01 1 Parity Odd Odd o Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 e PLC Transmission Parameter Setting When setting parameters on the PLC use the T series programmer and enter the following data for system information 7 COMPUTER LINK Station number Baud rate Parity Data length Stop bit 4 19200 bps Odd 8 bits 1 bit 13 TOSHIBA PLC 5 87 Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 X input register 1 XW as word device Y output register 2 YW as word device R auxiliary relay 5 RW as word device L link relay 6 LW as word device WwW link register 7 F file register 8 TN timer current value 9 Read only CN counter current value 10 Read only TS timer contact 11 Read only CS counter contact 12 Read only Wiring Wiring diagram
208. ime e Transferring screen data via the V6 CP cable Transfer screen data while the initial screen is displayed e Transferring screen data using the CF card or the memory card and the card recorder CREC 1 Connect the personal computer with the card recorder and save screen data on the memory card 2 Insert the CF card into the V7 unit or connect the card recorder and insert the memory card into the card recorder 3 Press the CF Card English switch The Card Menu screen is displayed 4 Follow the instructions as described in Card Menu Screen page 2 11 and transfer screen data e Transferring screen data via Ethernet 1 Press the IP Address English switch IRENE 2 The Ethernet screen is displayed E 3 Follow the instructions as described in Ethernet page 2 24 and set the IP address 4 Press the Setting Finished switch The initial screen displayed again 5 Transfer screen data from the computer via Ethernet O Z 4 O E O I O O g gt 0 22 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu e Auto uploading screen data from the CF card to the V7 unit 1 Transfer screen data from the computer to a CF card 2 Turn the V7 unit off Set the DIPSW1 on the V7 unit to the ON position and insert the CF card 3 Turn the V7 unit on The screen data is automatically uploaded from the CF card to the V7 unit 1 Main Menu Screen e To bring up the Main Menu screen in the RUN mode p
209. imum length V7 series to the terminating PLC 500 m RS 422 RS 485 connection PLCn n 1 to 32 Wiring RS 422 485 For connecting information refer to the instruction manual for the PLC Example The following example shows how one V7 series is connected to three PLCs made by MITSUBISHI For more information refer to the MITSUBISHP s instruction manual for the PLC Link unit Link unit Link unit RD terminating Terminating Terminating Terminating resistance resistance resistance resistance ON OFF OFF ON Use shielded twist pair cables op oO D O 3 3 Cc gt O O n 3 10 2 1 n Connection Multi drop V SFT Setting The following settings must be made on the V SFT editor Only the points different from those described in 1 1 Connection V SFT Setting page 3 3 are explained here PLC Selection Select the PLC that is connected Check that the PLC to be connected is ready for 1 n connection Refer to the Appendix e Setting Position System Setting gt PLC Type gt Select PLC Type dialog Communication Parameter Setting e Setting Position System Setting gt Comm Parameter gt Comm Parameter dialog e Setting Items Select 1 n for Connection PLC Port Setting Set the port number of each PLC not in the Comm Parameter dialog but in the Memory Setting dialog for each part Not
210. ing diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 422 Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a 9 FUJI PLC 9 Available PLCs FUJI PLC Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection PLC2Way F55 NV1L RS2 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O NC1L RS2 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O i F70 F70S MICREX F series NC1L RS4 RS 485 Wiring Diagram 3 O MICREX F series V4 1 aga F120H FFU120B RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O F120S F140S om E FI5OS FFK120A RS 485 Wiring Diagram 3 O NS T NJRS 1 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O FLEX PC series ghee NJRS 2 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 O NJRS 4 RS 485 Wiring Diagram 3 x RS 485 Hakko Electronics recae FLEX PC CPU port cable FU CPUNS x NJ B16 RS 232C port RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 x Computer link a FLEX PC COM T FLEX PC NJ JM terminal block RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 x 1 To use FLEX PC of Toyota version select FLEX PC T 2 To use FLEX PC CPU of Toyota version select FLEX PC CPU T Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows MICREX F Series FLEX PC Series Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even RS 2320 1 asynchronous non protocol by B PES c
211. ing on the PLC before making the setting on MONITOUCH e Setting Position System Setting gt Comm Parameter gt Comm Parameter dialog e Setting Items Connection 1 1 1 n Multi Link Multi Link 2 Select the type of connection between the V7 series and the PLC There are four types available Depending on the selected type the setting items in the Comm Parameter dialog or those for the memory vary Select 1 1 for 1 1 connection Local No Set the port number of the PLC Trans Mode Trans Mode 1 Trans Mode 4 When the PLC has a transmission mode setting set the same on the V7 series This setting must be used for PLCs of MITSUBISHI OMRON HITACHI YOKOGAWA Toyoda Machinery and YASKAWA Baud Rate Signal Level Data Length Stop Bit Parity Make the same setting as the PLC Refer to Chapter 5 Connection to PLCs Baud Rate 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 115 kbps Set the same communication speed as the PLC Signal Level RS232C RS422 Set the same communication interface as the PLC Data Length 7 bit 8 bit Choose either data length for communication Stop Bit 1 bit 2 bit Choose either stop bit for communication Parity None Odd Even Choose any of the parity options for communication Send Delay Time 0 to 255 Unit x 1 msec PLC Set a time delay in sending the next command to the PLC after receipt of a response fromthe PLC MONTOUCH Ae N
212. its Per Character Parity Stop Bits DF1 Full Duplex Setup Parameters Duplicate Packet Detection Checksum Constant Carrier Detect Message Timeout Hardware Handshaking Embedded Response Detect ACK Timeout x 5 ms ENQuiry Retries NAK Received Retries 19200 Even Enabled BCC Disabled 400 Disabled Auto Detect 90 3 3 11 Allen Bradley PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 15 pin male 1 1 1 1 1 1 j 1 1 1 L I I I I Use shielded twist pair cables O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin female Use shielded twist pair cables 11 Allen Bradley PLC Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 9 pin female Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 5 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male CTS PLC PLC D sub 9 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables D sub 9 pin female A B s RS 232C Ladder transfer cable Micro 11 Allen Bradley PLC 5 81 RS 422 Wiring Diagram 6 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male
213. k PLC2Way Communication Refer to modular Maker MITSUBISHI QnA series link E Baud Rate 19200BPS h Parity Even Y Trans Mode tA 7 Signal Level gt E C Rs rey p 4 FS232C RS 485 Time Out Time 5 l He Data Length Pit Send Delay Tine 0 Sfomsec SS Retum Time 1 foses tba oe Default OK Cancel Baud Rate 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115000 115 kbps Select the communication speed with the PLC connected at the MJ port Parity None Odd Even Select the parity setting for communications with the PLC connected at the MJ port Data Length 7 bit 8 bit Select the data length for communications with the PLC connected at the MJ port Stop Bit 1 bit 2 bit Select the stop bit setting for communications with the PLC connected at the MJ port Signal Level RS232C RS485 Select the signal level for communications with the PLC connected at the MJ port Retrials Set the number of retrials to be attempted in the case that a communication error occurs Time out Time x100 msec Select the receive time of the response from the PLC connected at the MJ port If no response is received within the specified time a retrial is attempted Send Delay Time x msec Set a time delay in sending the response to the PLC after receipt of data from the PLC connected at the MJ port 7 PLC2Way Return Time x10 sec When the PLC in the PLC2Way communication is turned off
214. lly reads screen data in this folder when the CF card is inserted in the V7 unit after the DIP switch is set Other folders are the same as access folders 2 16 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu Transferring Screen Data from a CF Card The procedure of transferring data between the V7 series and a CF card is described below 1 Mounting the CF Card Insert the CF card into the CF card connector at the side of the V7 unit Do not remove or insert the CF card in the later steps 2 Data selection Select Screen Data When the lamp is red it is selected 3 Transfer selection Select Display lt Card Display gt Card or Display lt gt Card Sam Reta CREC Menu CREC Menu Data Selection Transfer Menu gt Data Selection Transfer Menu Screen Display lt Card Display lt Card Screen Data SRAM SRAM Display gt Card Display lt gt Card Data selection Transfer selection When Display lt Card is Selected Transfer screen data from the computer to the CF card 1 When Display lt Card is selected the Card Transfer screen is displayed Flashes during communication with the CF card Indicates the name of the currently selected folder The access folder that is set for Card Transfer scree
215. mmunication parameter setting of the V7 series Baud rate 9600 19200bps 115 kbps available with FP2 Parity Odd fixed Data bit 8 or 7 select 8 normally Stop bit 1 fixed O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt oO v z O a ED 5 MATSUSHITA PLC MEWNET Link Unit Switch Setting Switch Setting Contents 1 ON 2 OFF Same as that set on V7 normally 19200 bps 3 OFF 4 OFF Data length 7 bits 5 ON With parity 6 ON Even 7 OFF Stop bit 1 8 OFF CS CD invalid Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks DT data register 0 X external input relay 1 WX as word device read only Y external output relay 2 WY as word device R internal relay 3 WR as word device including special relays L link relay 4 WL as word device LD link register 5 FL file register 6 SV timer counter set value 7 EV timer counter elapsed time 8 T timer contact 9 Read only Cc counter contact 10 Read only 5 MATSUSHITA PLC MEX Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC 1 a Sr Ta D sub 9 pin male 1 1 y 3 1 1 1 Use shielded twis
216. mory interface unit CU 03 192 168 1 58 Enabled Enabled 192 168 1 68 Enabled Enabled 192 168 1 66 Enabled Enabled 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 2 27 5 SRAM Clock e To use the built in clock of the V7 series or to use the SRAM memory or cassette it is necessary to select SRAM Clock Setting from the System Setting menu and make the SRAM clock setting For the setting procedure refer to the Reference Manual e Be sure to set the battery when using the built in clock of the V7 series or the SRAM memory or cassette Without battery the contents in the SRAM or clock data will not be retained When the battery is not connected the message Battery not set is displayed and the SRAM Clock switch flashes on the Main Menu screen Connect the battery immediately When the battery is to be replaced the message Brownout Battery is displayed V710iTD 2002 4 1 07 23 30 z O Z 4 O E O I O O g gt 0 System Information FONT IF DRV VER 1 240 MELSE SYSTEM PROG VER 1 000 VER 1 300 1 000 1 000 C QnH Q ENGLISH CPU Port S RAM Clock switch Sereen Data PLC Type MITSUBISHIQnH Q series CPU Information Comment Size 5111808 Multi Link2 Connection Multi Link Baud Rate 19200 Stat No E Indicates the message such as Battery not set or Brownout Battery Ethernet Information Speed 10BASE T No 102 168 1 68
217. n approx 105 Mbyte Resolution 800 x 600 or above recommended Display Function Specifications Item Specifications Display Language Japanese English Chinese Chinese Korean European Simplified dic E dec ANK code Latin 1 ASCII code ASCllcode ASCII code 2 byte Chinese Hangul ur S41 2 level E vee simplified without Kanji 2 byte 32 dot JIS 1 level Character Size 1 4 size 8 x 8 dots 1 byte 8 x 16 dots 2 byte 16 x 16 dots or 32 x 32 dots Enlarge W 1 to 8 times H 1 to 8 times Number of Resolution 640 x 480 800 x 600 Displayable 1 4 size 80 columns x 60 lines 100 columns x 75 lines Characters z 1 byte 80 columns x 30 lines 100 columns x 37 lines 2 byte 40 columns x 30 lines 50 columns x 37 lines Characters Display properties Normal reverse blink bold shadow Properties Colors 32 768 colors blink 16 colors V708C 128 colors blink 16 colors Graphics Lines Line continuous line box parallelogram polygon Circles Circle arc sector ellipse elliptical arc Others Tile patterns Graphic Properties Line types 6 thin thick dot chain broken two dot chain Tile patterns Display properties Colors Color selection 16 incl user definable 8 patterns Normal reverse blink 32 768 colors blink 16 colors V708C 128 colors blink 16 colors Foreground background boundary line Refer to the Reference
218. n o gt a 3 Connector for 10BASE T for high performance type only This connector enables Ethernet connection with a host computer High speed communications are possible via Ethernet for uploading downloading screen data and reading writing data from to the server 4 Video Display Upgraded for high performance type only optional The video display function is upgraded drastically to allow saving the current video screen taking snapshots of multiple exposures superimposing a semi transparent operation screen on a video display showing four video channels at the same time and so on 5 Web Server Function for high performance type only The V7i screens are converted into HTML files and displayed on the WWW browser using the Ethernet 6 Animation Function The animation function enables representation of the field close to the real image 7 Play of WAV File for high performance type only optional WAV files can be played with ease simply by connecting the option unit to the speaker It is possible to use sound for notifying the field conditions such as an occurrence of an error The monitoring operator can work from a distance ED 2 Models and Peripheral Equipment 2 Models and Peripheral Equipment MONITOUCH Models The model name consists of the following information V7 L Power supply specification D 24 VDC specification in compliance with CE UL cUL None 100 240
219. n data defaults If there is no screen CF Card File Infomation _ access data DAT0000 defaults DSP0000 BIN 2002 03 20 10 58 56 2 Sys Program V710 V712 Fe Pantie ENGLISH Indicates the free space in the CF card Version 1 300 1 010 1 000 I F Driver GENERAL pa P Version 1 240 Select Folder Used for checking or renaming folder Screen PLC Type GENERAL Screen Comment names Display lt Card FS Select Data Starts transferring data Display lt Card Retum Moves back to the previous screen Indicates the information of the currently selected folder 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 2 Check the folder name free space and CF card file information If the correct folder is selected move to step 4 e Folder Name Indicates the name of the currently selected folder The access folder that is set for screen data defaults If there is no screen data DATO000 defaults e Rest Size Indicates the free space in the CF card e CF Card File Information Indicates the information of the currently selected folder 3 To change to another folder press the Select Folder switch The Select Folder screen is displayed Select Folder 0 Folder Name AAAAAAAA Folder Selection BBBBBEBB ceccecce Moves the cursor
220. n on the right Notes on V4 or GD 80 data conversion When converting data of V4 or GD 80 into the V7 data S5 V4 is automatically selected for the PLC type With V4 or GD 80 the order of bit strings of input relay Q output relay and F internal relay is byte reversed Please take note of this m F0000207 F0000200 Y Y 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Memory setting of v4 J FO000217 or GD 80 F0000210 Y Y 15 14 13 12111 10 9 8 Memory to be accessed to PLC by F20 0 lt V4 D or GD 80 L gt F207 F21 0 lt gt F21 7 eee Block number Memory setting of V7 F0000217 m F0000207 F0000210 F0000200 Y YY Y 15 14113 12111 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Memory to be accessed to PLC by V7 F21 0 lt F20 0 lt gt F21 7 gt F20 7 15 SIEMENS PLC MEX S5 PG port Memory TYPE Remarks DB data register 0 Use memory address DB3 and later input relay IW as word device Q output relay 2 QW as word device E flag internal relay 3 FW as word device T timer current value 4 Cc counter current value 5 AS absolute address 6 The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen Example DB003 000 as shown on the right Block numbe
221. n result Stores the execution result of macro command SEND EREAD or EWRITE 0 Normal 1 Error Bits 4 to 15 System reserved Not used at present Always set 0 GED tt Ethernet Ethernet Access Functions HKEtn10 DLL To enable Ethernet communications between the server and the V7 series it is necessary to create an application based on HKEtn10 dll for UDP IP provided by us using Visual C Visual Basic etc Sample Folder The Sample folder for Ethernet communications is included in the V SFT CD ROM The Ethernet folder contains sample programs created using Visual C and the VBA folder contains those created using VBA Refer to these sample program when creating an application If necessary you can copy and tailor the program to your requirements V SFT CD ROM ____ Sample Ethernet Release Res VBA e Ethernet The following files are contained in the respective folders Ethernet ESmpl dsp ESmpl h ESmpl cpp ESmpl rc ESmpl clw MainFrm h MainFrm cpp ESmplDoc h ESmplDoc cpp ESmplView h ESmplView cpp StdAfx h StdAfx cpp Resource h ReadMe txt HKEtn10 h Release HKEtn10 dll HKEtn10 lib res ESmpl ico ESmpl rc2 Toolbar bmp ESmplDoc ico e VBA The following files are contained in this folder VBA HKEtn10 dll VBA_Sample xls To execute this program copy the above files to the C TEST folder Port No
222. n the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 R link register 1 B file register 2 N current value register 3 X input relay 4 WX as word device Y output relay 5 WY as word device M internal relay 6 WM as word device K keep relay 7 WK as word device L link relay 8 WL as word device T timer contact 9 WT as word device Cc counter contact 10 WC as word device U extensional data register 11 H extensional set value register 12 EN extensional current value register 13 EX extensional input relay 14 WEX as word device EY extensional output relay 15 WEY as word device EM extensional internal relay 16 WEM as word device EK extensional keep relay 17 WEK as word device EL extensional link relay 18 WEL as word device ET extensional timer contact 19 WET as word device EC extensional counter contact 20 WEC as word device V special register 21 WV as word device Screen Editing Memory Input When Split Data Area is selected for Trans Mode the PRG No setting is available in the Memory Input dialog e Range for PRG No 1 to 3 Memory Input PLC Memory TOYOPUC Type Internal Mem 4 5 6 C D m a elelee PRG No a ela 8 Toyopuc PLC 5 57 Wiring Wir
223. nally available mn D e For the terminating resistance on the V7 series turn the DIP switch DIPSW7 to the D ON position on the side towards the rear O le e Twist pair cables of 0 3 mm sq or above are recommended Cc 4 wire system z seb VF CNt To the PLC s o Shield RS422 port gt Signal Name Pin No mn AS NOA ee anand ogee me FG pp a SD 12 i gt Receive data i SD 13 i d wy Receive data RD 24 m gt Send data RD 25 oi F gt Send data SG 7 t7 SG 2 wire system VIAONA To the PLC s Shield RS422 port Signal Name Pin No a a taste ANA FG 14 pP de pa m H i E Send receive data SD 13 i i 4 Send receive data RD 24 E o i RD 25 o SG 7 FT gt SG V SFT Setting For serial communications the following settings on the V SFT editor are required The settings in the Select PLC Type and Comm Parameter dialogs are shown on the Main Menu screen of the V7 series Refer to Chapter 2 MONITOUCH Operations 1 Connection PLC Selection Select the PLC that is connected e Setting Position System Setting gt PLC Type gt Select PLC Type dialog Communication Parameter Setting The communication parameter setting is essential for successful communications between the V series lt PLC Check the communication parameter sett
224. nce ON for RS 422 1 For signal level RS 422 baud rate is fixed to 9600 bps Mistubishi A Series Link Link Unit KZ L10 Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Port 0 0 Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Parity Even Even i Data length 7 7 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Terminating resistance ON for RS 422 Set the port with the port setting switch the terminating resistance with terminator and the baud rate data bit parity stop bit with SET B DIP switches For more information refer to the instruction manual for KZ L10 O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a EMT 8 KEYENCE PLC KZ KV Series CPU KV 700 CPU Communication parameters for the V7 series are automatically set KZ24 300 CPU Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Port 0 0 Baud rate 38400 bps 38400 bps Parity Even Transmission code pata sengih i Stop bit 1 Terminating resistance 1 Maximum baud rate available is 38400 bps If a higher baud rate is selected communications are performed at 9600 bps KV10 24 CPU Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Port 0 0 Baud rate 57600 bps 57600 bps Parity Even o Data length 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 Terminating resistance 1 Maximum baud rate available is 57600 bps If a higher baud rate is selected comm
225. nd RGB IN or RGB OUT is mounted 13 Add on memory connector MEMORY This is the connector where the optional FLASH memory cassette V7EM F or SRAM cassette V7EM S is mounted 14 DIP switch 8 bit DIP switch used for setting terminating resistance of the CN1 signal line and the MJ1 MJ2 RS 422 485 signal line 15 Battery holder Contains a backup battery for SRAM and clock When the battery voltage drops replace the battery with a new one V7 BT I D 5 a D 5 o Mm D Q o E on o gt a 7 Mounting Procedure Mounting Procedure Mounting Procedure 1 Cut out the mounting panel max thick 5 mm to match the dimensions shown below Mounting panel Panel cut out hole 2 with the locking screws Tightening torque V708 V708i V710 V710i 0 3 to 0 5 Nem V712 V712i 0 5 to 0 7 Nem Fixtures gt Fixture dimensions Unit mm 110 5 o 073 P4 When the V7 unit is attached to the mounting panel the fixtures and frame grounds FG are connected To prevent static electricity be sure to connect the mounting panel to the frame ground fa Panel cut out dimensions 220 5 3 gt Unit mm vrogiv708i 3 289 35 3134 j V710 V710i V712 V712i 2 N N XX y Mounting hole K Insert four fixtures attached to the V7 series into the mounting holes and tighten them Mounting hole V7 series Mounting
226. ng resistance of the V7 series should be set on the DIP switch ON sll nl el a ol Vi 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MJ2 modular jack 2 terminating resistance CF auto load Not used CN1 RD terminating resistance at pins 24 and 25 MJ1 modular jack 1 terminating resistance e When the PLC and the master station are connected via RS 422 485 set the terminating resistance at the PLC and the master station CN1 e When the V7 series master and slave stations are connected via RS 485 2 wire set the terminating resistance at the V7 series master station MJ1 2 and the terminating slave station CN1 Terminating Resistance Setting Example 1 When the PLC is connected to V7 series master station via RS 232C PLC Terminal block RS 232C RS 485 2 wire CN1 MJ1 2 CN1 CN1 CN1 V7 master station V7 slave station V7 slave station V7 slave station Local Port 1 Local Port 2 Local Port 3 Local Port 4 ON ON When MJ1 is m m m ml m used 123456738 TEEPE 8 Te j ON 1 When MJ2 is ia used A ep oO D O 3 3 a 5 O je Oo n 3 14 3 n 1 Connection Multi link 2 2 When the PLC is connected to V7 series master station via
227. nics Name Type Contents Replacement battery for the V7 series V7 BT e Coin type lithium primary cell Sanyo 1 pce e Cautions sticker 1 pce 1 Replace the battery V7 BT within three minutes after the V7 unit is turned off If it is not possible to replace within three minutes use the V SFT editor cable V6 CP or a CF card and make a backup copy of data in the SRAM cassette e When using the V SFT editor IL fe Q w D ie O D Q gt O 0 o n 1 Start the V SFT editor 2 Click the Transfer icon The Transfer dialog is displayed 3 Select Display for Transfer Device and SRAM Data for Transfer Data To save a backup copy from the V SFT editor on the server via Ethernet check Transfer through Ethernet IP Address of the V7 Equipped with SRAM Keep Use Simulator and Read Comments in Data Transfer unchecked 4 Click the PC lt under Transfer Mode 5 Save the read data in the RAM file e When using a CF card For the backup procedure with a CF card refer to Chapter 2 MONITOUCH Operations 2 Turn the unit off and open the battery holder A battery is set at the socket 3 Unplug the battery connector and remove the battery from the socket When removing the battery push the center of the battery holder cover as shown on the right 4 Seta new battery Hold the battery with its red cable side Battery holder B marked with
228. normally finished The specified operation has been concluded normally CREC not connecting CREC is not connecting when selecting a modular jack CREC Communication Error A communication error occurred between V7 and CREC when selecting a modular jack Memory Card not setting A memory card is not inserted Memory Card Capacity over Cannot write the data into a memory card because the data size in V7 is larger than the capacity of a memory card Write Protect ON Cannot write data into a memory card because the write protect switch in a memory card is ON Writing Error occurred The error occurred while writing data into a memory card Selected data does not exist The data in the reading target does not exist V7 type is different The specified type of the data in V7 is different from the type of the memory card data Selected data can not be read The data in a memory card cannot be read Reading Error occurred The error occurred during writing data into a flash ROM of V7 Data discrepant There is some discrepancy in data when comparing data between a memory card and V7 Screen data on V7 will be broken Warning about data destruction in V7 that may occur when transferring the font data larger than the present data from a memory card to V7 The OK switch continues transferring the Cancel switch stops transferring Undefined Error occurred
229. nt DFlag 1 9 Internal memory int HKEtn_ReadInternalMemory WORD dp unsigned short Wordent int Page 4 31 Word DeviceType DWORD addr char lIpAdar int DFlag 1 9 Memory card int HKEtn_ReadCardMemory WORD dp unsigned short Wordent int Page 4 32 memory Word FileNo int RecordNo DWORD addr char lpAddr int DFlag 1 9 PLC memory int HKEtn_ReadPIcBitMemory int IpOnFlag int DeviceType DWORD Page 4 33 Bit addr int BitNo char IpAddr g Internal memory int HKEtn_ReadInternalBitMemory int IpOnFlag int Device Type DWORD Bit addr int BitNo char IpAddr Page 4 34 Memory card int HKEtn_ReadCardBitMemory int IpOnFlag int FileNo int memory Bit RecordNo DWORD addr int BitNo char lpAddr PLC memory int HKEtn_ReadBlockMemory WORD sp BYTE pReadblockData int Page 4 34 Word block BlockCnt char IpAddr 9 e Write PLC memory int HKEtn_WritePlcMemory WORD sp unsigned short Wordent int Page 4 35 Word DeviceType DWORD addr char lpAddr int DFlag 1 9 PLC memory int HKEtn_WritePlcMemory2 DWORD sp unsigned short Wordent int Page 4 36 Double word Device Type DWORD addr char IpAddr int DFlag 1 9 Internal memory int HKEtn_WritelnternalMemory WORD sp unsigned short Wordent int Page 4 37 Word DeviceType DWORD addr char lpAddr int DFlag 1 9 Memory card int HKEtn_WriteCardMemory WORD sp unsigned short Wordent int Page 4 38 memory Word FileNo int RecordNo DWORD addr char IpAddr int DFlag 1 9 PLC memory int HKEtn_WritePlcBitMemory int Device Type
230. ommand fixed Transmission mode h Ib RS 422 3 asynchronous non protoco y E command fixed A Data length 7 ASCII 7 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Terminating resistance at receiver Provided for RS 485 FLEX PC CPU Port o FUIPLC ED Connect to the CPU port Communication parameters for the V7 series are automatically set FLEX PC COM T NJ Computer Link Toyota Version Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even 5 Data length 7 7 Transmission code Stop bit 2 2 MICREX F Series FLEX PC Series Switch Setting MODE switch RS 485 Port Setting SW RS 232C 1 0 for both x10 x1 RS 485 terminating resistance ON Character switches No Setting Contents 8 ON Switch Setting 7 ON With parity 6 ON Even 5 ON 7 bits 4 ON 1 bit 3 ON 2 ON Same as that set on V7 normally 19200 bps 1 OFF O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a E v Furic Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs MICREX F Series Memory TYPE Remarks M auxiliary relay 0 WM as word device K keep relay 1 WK as word devi
231. oocccncconncccococoncninnccnnno Display Function Specifications Function Performance Specifications oononnnnnnnnninnonnnnnoconnncnnacanarn cnn cnn no ronca rin crac 1 13 5 Dimensions and Panel Clt QOUt ooconnccnonccnnccnonnconcnnannnonnnnnn cnn nn rnn cnn cnn 1 14 V708 V708i External View and DiMENSIONS ooccnnnccnnoconononannnanncnna conca ran cc nono nano nana ran c ran cnn canon 1 14 V710 V710i External View and DiMENSIONS ooccnnnccnnoconoconannnanncnann conc conan ono nono nn crono ran c rancia ncnnns 1 15 V712 V712i External View and DiMENSIONS oocccnoccnnocnnononannnanncnnnc nn cnno nono nora n cnn nara nn ran ccnnncnnn 1 16 6 Names and Functions Of Components ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeseaeeseeeesaeeseeeeeaees 1 17 7 Mounting Procedure Mounting Procedure citada Lidia 1 20 MOUNTING ANG lO ori 1 20 8 Power Supply Cable Connection cccceeccseecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeseaeeseeeesaeesneeeneeessaes 1 21 Power Supply Cable Connection eee cece cee cece eceee esas rana n nan c cnn rrnn cra nono rra ran 1 21 Notes on Usage of 100 240 VAC Specifications wee 1 22 AUN A case aoe 1 22 9 Coin type Lithium Battery ooooocicconciciccnnnnonnncononnnnnncnnrn non nncnn rra 1 23 Battery Mounting Procedure 1 23 Battery Replacement isss inddarra A AA AAA 1 24 10 DIP SWITCA SOtting ecfevesccnce ieiki paa eE ore eT NeT ara 1 26 DIP Switch DIPSW Setting coca a keap aa
232. or the PLC2 memory is fixed as mentioned above Refer to page 3 37 Normally the V7 series handles numerical data as DEC with signs For numerical data to be handled on the PLC connected to the MJ port select Word or Double Word for Data Type for data to be handled as bits select Bit Example Word Double Word Target PLC memory Bco 15 14 13 12 11 110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 10 Depends on the communication o o olololololololololol11o0 110 parameter setting co Code Bit Data Temperature MSB ESB control PLC2 aci 15 14 13 12 11 10 98 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 i memory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 o MSB LSB v V7 series DEC 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 10 O ojo jo ojojojojojoJo 0J0 1 0 10 Q 3 MSB LSB gt O seb o N are Not necessary to be aware Example Bit Code Bit Data Temperature 10 control PLC2 BCD memory MSB LSB V7 series pec 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 16 0 ojojo 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 lt Target PLC memory BCD pe Depends on the communication t tti pel _ Not necessary to be aware When 3 is double clicked the Temp CTRL PLC2Way Table Setting dialog is displayed Set the memory addresses of the target PLC memory and target internal memory at one time in the Temp CTRL PL
233. ordcnt int FileNo int RecordNo DWORD addr char IpAddr int DFlag 1 This function is retained until write completion is received from the V7 series It is reset on receipt of write completion to the memory card memory e Parameters sp Wordent FileNo RecordNo addr IpAddr DFlag Return values Success Failure Error details Target block pointer Contents Word Count No 1 1 No 2 1 No n 1 Word count to be transferred max 2000 words File number Record number Top memory address to be written IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX 0 1 2 Refer to page 4 29 TRUE FALSE Get using HKEtn_GetLastError 1 Ethernet 4 39 Write Bits to PLC Memory int HKEtn_WritePlIcBitMemory int DeviceType DWORD addr int BitNo int OnFlag char IpAddr This function is retained until write completion is received from the V7 series It is reset on receipt of write completion to the PLC memory e Parameters DeviceType Address of the device to be written Refer to Chapter 5 Connection to PLCs addr Top memory address to be written For YOKOGAWA or YASKAWA PLCs specify a number 1 for the address addr Example D400 gt 399 D25 gt 24 BitNo Bit number to be accessed Example 1 When accessing to D20 05 of MITSUBISHI PLC DeviceType 0 addr 20 BitNo 5 Example 2 When accessing to M20 of MITSUBISHI PLC 20 16 1 4
234. ords in the memory addresses used in the temperature control network PLC2Way table that is set for No of Table 2 Memory card setting When SRAM or CF Card is selected for Store Target in the Buffering Area Setting nm dialog the memory card setting is required T The used memory capacity of SRAM and CF card can be calculated in the same way as the buffering area Q 1 Click System Setting gt Memory Card Setting The Memory Card dialog is opened S emo coa S 8 ls i Jm e e Jas o sl ea E I F Memo 402000 E F Use Temp Control Ne PLEZWay Type METIO Memory por 00 a E 2 Select Buffering File for Type 3 Match the file number tab in the Memory Card dialog with Output File No in the Buffering Area Setting dialog Buffering Area Setting xl Memory Card Z E los 10 ati E O Tz A EA 0 IES A SA E ia fs a te e VF Memoy 8402000 E Info Dutput Memory uT5340 E IV Use Sample Buffer F Use Temp Control NePLE2 ay Transfer Mode I Memoy Designation D0000 EE Sampling Method Temp Control Net PLC2 y Data Record Name No of Table i Sampling Time p EH oy pomo e No of Samples 1 E p Full Processing Continuous zl 0 0 Stop I Use Start Bit Select the tab of the same number I Replay Sound Consect EZB 7 Pic2way 3 Trend sampling or data sampling setting To show dat
235. ormally use the default setting Send delay time t Start Time Set a time delay in seconds in starting communications on the V7 series to avoid a delay in PLC processing that may occur when the V7 series and the PLC are turned on at the same time 1 1 1 Connection EB Choose the action to be taken against communication errors Comm Error Handling Set error handling routine in the case that a communication error between the V7 series and the PLC occurs Stop If any communication error has arisen the communications are stopped When restoring use the Retry switch found on the error screen of the V7 series Continuous If any communication error has arisen it is indicated at the top left corner on the V7 screen The V7 series conducts polling of the PLC and if OK the error state is automatically reset Supplemental Information Polling Polling means to constantly monitor and check the state of the other station Time out Time 0 to 999 Unit x10 msec Specify a time for monitoring the receiving of a response from the PLC If no response is received within the specified time a retrial is attempted ep oO D O 3 3 a 5 O je O n Retrials 1 to 255 Specify the number of retrial times When the problem persists even after as many retrials as specified the system will start the error handling routine Text Processing i gt
236. own Adjusts the screen brightness in the switch for one second or more three levels F2 changes the contract rapidly F3 a Applicable ae V710T V710iT V710S V710iS F4 g models V712S V712T F2 F3 F4 F2 Fs Fa Adjustment lt 4 gt 1 2 3 Dark Medium Pale Bright Medium Dark Turn the backlight on and off Backlight control should be set on the V SFT editor System Setting gt Unit Setting gt Unit Setting dialog Backlight tab window Always ON Auto 1 Auto 2 Manual Manual 2 e When the F5 switch is pressed e The F5 switch turns the the backlight goes off even before backlight on and off the setting OFF time is reached e Backlight Power ON Time FS Backlight e This is valid when the backlight Control that determines the control bit bit 11 in the read area backlight status at power up Ignored n 1 in the system memory is becomes valid reset OFF 0 When the power is turned on ON gt Backlight ON OFF gt Backlight OFF The backlight will be in the above status 1 When a medium or dark brightness is set the backlight service life may become shorter O Z 4 O Cc O I O O e gt n 2 32 3 Errors Displayed on the V7 Series 3 Errors Displayed on the V7 Series There are five kinds of error messages displayed on the V series Communication Error Check Warning SYSTEM ERROR Touch switch is active Cie ON 1 Communication Error When you
237. p 1 n Overlap 2 L System reserved setting 0 lt Global macro execution 0 gt 1 leading edge Data Sheet output 0 gt 1 leading edge Screen hard copy 0 gt 1 leading edge L _ Backlight level ae i Normal overlap or call overlap Analog RGB input level 0 gt 1 0N i Screen internal switching level 1 gt 0 OFF Screen forced switching 0 gt 1 leading edge Multi overlap E L Data read refresh 0 gt 1 leading edge 1 Level with exceptions gt 1 1 1 Connection 3 7 e SCRN_No n 2 Screen number command 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 __ System reserved setting 0 Saison number Use example To specify a screen number from the PLC When DO is set for Read Area the screen number is written in D2 of the PLC Problem example The screen display does not change when a screen number is specified from the PLC If the same number as the one specified for n 2 is already contained in this memory address the screen display does not change even if it is specified again For example if screen No 5 is specified from the PLC and it was once changed to screen No 2 gt No 0 by internal switches normally it cannot be returned to the former screen No 5 that was specified by an external command because the extern
238. p Test Self Loop Test 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 2 7 MJ1 2 RS 232C Signal Test Turn the MJ1 or MJ2 and RS232C switches on Communication Port CN1 RS232C MJ1 RS485 MJ2 e RS 232C Self loop Test Check the signals SD and RD Connect the data transfer cable V6 CP to CN1 for the test ADP25 9 O Z 4 O Cc O I O O e gt Mm 1 Set the adaptor ADP25 9 attached to V6 CP to the cable V6 CP Connect the modular jack side of the cable to MJ1 or MJ2 and the ADP25 9 side to CN1 2 Press the Self Loop Test switch When the OK lamp lights up the test is successfully completed CTS RTS XN mcm meen t Self Leap Test Self Loop Test If the NG lamp lights up consult your local distributor MJ1 2 RS 485 Signal Test If you would like to perform MJ1 2 RS 485 signal test consult your local distributor 2 2 2 3 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu Print Check Check that the V7 series transmits the signals to the printer correctly 1 Connect the V7 series to the printer 2 Press the Printer Check switch The test is successful when a test page is printed out without problem Example 1 O Test Main Menu
239. panel Fixtures 3 Mount the gasket in contact with the mounting panel so that it will be sandwiched securely between the unit and the mounting plate Mounting Angle Install the unit within the angle of 15 to 135 degrees as shown on the right 90 8 Power Supply Cable Connection 8 Power Supply Cable Connection Electric shock hazard lt gt DANGER Shut the power off before connecting the power supply cable Power Supply Cable Connection e Connect the power supply cable to the terminal on the backside of the unit V708 V708i V710 V710i V712 V712i Po E 9D a fea a EBEB a nl ae 2 a a BSE o a E gt 100 240 VAC specification 24 VDC specification 2ayoc _ 3 ENE 1S Power supply 24 VDC 10 rounding Power supply Power supply 100 240 VAC E 24 VDC 10 Grounding x Grounding e When connecting the power supply cable tighten the terminal screws to the following torque Model Terminal Screw Screw Size Tightening Torque Crimp style Terminal Unit mm V708 V708i M3 5 0 5 Nem 7 1 MAX OA 74 max O HI V710 V710i V712 V712i M4 0 5 Nem 7 9 MAX TO AE 7 0 max D EE e
240. power supply Compliant with CE UL cUL V712 series y712iS TFT color 800 x 600 dots high performance AC power 12 inch supply V712iSD TFT color 800 x 600 dots high performance DC power Compliant with CE UL cUL supply Peripheral Equipment The following options are available for using the V7 series more effectively V SFT drawing software English version supported with ver 2 00 and later Application software for editing display data for the V series Windows98 NT4 0 Me 2000 XP compatible The V7 series is E D o D oO Mm O D Q oh o S n o D ED 2 Models and Peripheral Equipment EU xx option unit This option unit can only be mounted on the V7i model xx 00 gt Video input sound output unit Video images can be displayed on V7i directly WAV files can be played at an external speaker xx 01 gt RGB input sound output unit Screen images displayed on a CRT display can be shown on V7i WAV files can be played at an external speaker xx 02 gt RGB output sound output unit Screen images displayed on V7i can be shown on a CRT display WAV files can be played at an external speaker xx 03 gt Sound output unit WAV files can be played at an external speaker V7EM F FLASH memory cassette Extension print circuit board to extend the memory for screen data The capacity of FLASH memory is 8 Mbyte V7EM S SRAM cass
241. r Transceiver Power supply for the transceiver 12 VDC 1 segment max 500 m max 100 nodes AUI cable max 50 m Minimum node interval 2 5m To extend the length or increase the number of nodes use repeaters Ethernet unit PLC N type terminator Maximum segments 5 Net t Maximum network distance 2500 m a e os Maximum network nodes 100 sets 1 12 V power supply is required for each transceiver e Transceiver Use the transceiver equipped with the SQE TEST function SQE TEST Signal Quality Error Test Recommended transceiver Manufacturer Type Allied Telesis CentreCOM 107 The I F unit may be broken if the AUI connector is subject to strong force Use the AUI cable when connecting the transceiver When the power lamp of the transceiver is not turned on check the wiring of 12 VDC power supply then replace the fuse refer to page 4 4 of the I F unit CU 03 For the replacement procedure refer to the manual CU 03 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS attached to CU 03 e 10BASE2 The following devices are required for 10BASE2 connection Coaxial cable for 10BASE2 AUI cable T type adaptor Terminator for 10BASE2 Transceiver Power supply for the transceiver 12VDC 1 Ethernet 4 7 e Transceiver 1 segment max 185 m max 30 nodes Ethernet unit PLC AUI cable max 50 m To extend the segment distance Ethernet or
242. r For connection with the PLC using a temperature controller or the PLC2Way function use the other MJ port and use CN1 for communications with the PLC Data of the PLC or temperature controller can be collected through communications with the V7 series Data collection is available even between the products of different manufacturers e Either signal level RS 232C or RS 485 can be selected With RS 232C one V7 series can be connected with RS 485 a maximum of 31 V7 series can be connected lt RS 485 connection gt RS 232C RS 422 RS 485 hg PLC Port 31 Local RS 232C Temperature controller inverter or PLC op oO D O 3 3 Cc gt O O mn EZB Ce V Link Wiring Cable Use Hakko Electronics cable V6 TMP 3 m for connection with a computer The shielded frame ground of V6 TMP must be connected to the V7 series V6 TMP Notes on Use of V6 TMP There are six wires in the V6 TMP cable as shown on Brown 5Y the right The wires to be used are determined Red 0V SG depending on the connecting method For the wires Orange RXD not used be sure to properly insulate with tape etc gt
243. r S7 200PPI Memory TYPE Remarks V data memory 0 VW as word device l input 1 IW as word device Possible to write to the unused area Q output 2 QW as word device M bit memory 3 MW as word device T timer current value 4 C counter current value 5 TB timer contact 6 Read only CB counter contact 7 Read only HC high speed counter contact 8 Double word usable AIW analog input 9 AQW analog output 10 SM special memory special relay 11 SMW as word device S stage 12 SW as word device S7 300 400MPI Memory TYPE Remarks DB Data Word 0 Use memory address DB1 and later l input IW as word device Q output 2 QW as word device M Marker Word 3 MW as word device T timer current value 4 C counter current value 5 The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as Example DB003 000 shown on the right Address Block number O O 5 5 oO O e 5 Le Oo v O 19 END 5 SIEMENS PLC T1500 505 TI500 505 V4 Memory TYPE Remarks V variable memory 0 WX word input 1 WY word output 2 Xx discrete input 3 Y discrete output 4 CR control relay 5 TCP timer counter set value 6 TCC timer counter current time 7 DCP drum count set value 8 1 DCC drum count current value 9 Read only DSP drum step set value 10 DSC drum step current value 11 K fixed memory 12 STW system state 13 1 In
244. r screen display changes Consecutive three words from the specified memory address are used as read area Address Name Contents n RCVDAT Sub command data n 2 SCRN_COM Screen status command n 1 SCRN_No Screen number command When you have created screens with the following function the number of required memory addresses vary When the sampling function is used Refer to the Reference Manual Function When L_ Read Write Area GD 80 Compatible is checked Refer to the GD 80 User s Manual Set 0 for all the bits not used in the read area e RCVDAT n Sub command data 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 Free H a E EA TN O NACO edge To forcibly change the bits for free BZ1 0 gt 1 leading edge i area the same data is written to L System reserved setting 0 i CFMDATA in Write Area after the y i Screen is displayed I Calendar setting 0 1 leading edge Use this function for watch dog or System reserved setting 0 display scanning y e SCRN_COM n 1 Screen status command 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 0 0 0 01 0 Overlap 0 Overla
245. r5 Connection to PLCs 1 MITSUBISHI PLC ic nico idad iii de 5 1 Available PECS Socia adi ia 5 1 COMMUNICATION Seti cion cavdescentebieavedveurtesdevecteatedsecees 5 4 A Series Link QnA Series Link Switch Setting ooooniccccnonicicnnocccnnonccconancnnnnncnccnnncnnnnnc ca nanoncannnns 5 6 Available Memory ii ias 5 8 WINING 5 E EA AA IA E AA TA 5 11 A Uk N6t10 estoi A Ad 5 15 V MDD Dual Port INterface iioiciciiiiaj ti N A P 5 17 Ladder Transfer Function 2 3 4 HITACHI Pi Ah Alo eth ert ica a ee eect ee ees Available PLG Sminia a na e i daa Communication Settidg oooccconnccnnnncccnnnccnnnnncccnnnnoconnnnncnnanncnnnnn cnn naar nc nn nnn cnn nnnn cra rana crac HIDICGHH Ee SWwitch Setting iii Available Memory 0 c eee cece ee eeee cece eeeeeeeaeeceaeseeeeseaeeeeeeeeaeesaeeseesnaeseaeeseeeesaeeseeeseseeesaesnaeeee 5 MATSUSHITA PLC ui Sa tiie eee eee Available PLO Sagarni Su cevadecsssaveuiens A AA A A A a A Ae Communication Setting icon A aid MEWNET Link Unit Switch Setting ooooocooncnccnonnnnnncononnnnnnonnnnn non noncnnrnoncnnn nono nno nen nancn rr crac 5 42 Available MEMORY veccciac an a a a a a 5 42 A NN 5 43 6 YOKOGAWA PLE naar iAidns 5 45 Available A AO OO 5 45 COMMUNICATION MA oa 5 46 Available Memo a dla dada cafes 5 47 WING 2 e 2h a 5 48 7 YASKAWA Plica dada 5 50 Available PELOS toc oia Aid 5 50 Communication Setting 5 50 Available MeMorY c
246. ransfer Menu Screen Data Display lt Card Screen Data Display lt Card NE N _ Pisplay gt Card SRAM Pisplay lt gt Card 3 The SRAM Transfer screen is displayed e When Display gt Card or Display lt gt Card is selected the following screen is displayed Select the CF card folder having the same name as the access folder for screen data in the V7 series The name is shown on the screen The transferred file is named as SRAMO000 BIN Flashes during communication with the CF card Indicates the name of the currently selected file Indicates the name of the currently selected folder SRAM Transfer CF Card File Infomation Indicates the free space in the CF card Starts transferring data Display gt Card Moves back to the previous screen 00O 8 6 POWER Shows Display lt gt Card when Display lt gt Card is selected O Z 4 O E O I O O g gt 0 2 22 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu e When Display lt Card is selected the following screen is displayed Flashes during communication with the CF card Indicates the name of the currently selected file SRAM Transfer Indicates the name of the currently CF Card File Infomation _ aScess Folder Name CCCCCCCEs selected folder g Rest Size 29054KAM 1 SR
247. rature Indirect PLC Memory Memory Control Table No Memory Card Designation FO O O O O FA O O TEMP_READ Temperature control network table read TEMP_READ FO lt TABLE F1 TEMP_WRITE Data in memory addresses starting from F1 is transferred to the PLC2 memory of the temperature control network PLC2Way table specified for FO Usable Devices Internal Constant Temperature Indirect REG Memory Memory Control Table No Memory Card Designation FO O O F1 O O O O TEMP_WRITE Temperature control network table write TEMP_WRITE TABLE FO lt F1 7 PLC2Way REED 2 Memory card setting The memory card setting should be made when the memory card is used as the source or target memory for a macro command 1 Click System Setting gt Memory Card xi Setting The Memory Card dialog is 8 E E E E E fix E opened UF Meme fre aga 2 Select Data File for Type Transfer Mode Check Use Temp Control Net PLC2Way a No of Records al IDO 3 Click the Table No button and select the table number to be used The appropriate number is automatically set for No of Datal Y C Data Record Name Indirect Memory Designation 02 oO D O O 3 3 Cc 5 O 2 Oo n It is possible to have access to the PLC2 memory using the indirect memory designation as a macro command In this section the indirect designation of the PLC2 memory is e
248. rature control network PLC2Way table periodical reading e s763 e TEMP_CTL BCLR BINV Execution of macro a e TEMP_READ e TEMP_WRITE MOV BMOV BSET When the PLC2 memory is used for the above command Execution of macro a TEMP_CTL u100 2 TEMP_CTL u110 2 TEMP_CTL u120 2 TEMP_CTL u300 2 Execution of macro b TEMP_CTL u100 2 Temperature control TEMP_CTL u110 2 TEMP_CTL u120 K network PLC2Way table periodical reading TEMP_CTL u300 2 Execution of macro b s762 1 TEMP_CTL u100 2 TEMP_CTL u110 2 TEMP_CTL u120 2 TEMP_CTL u300 2 s762 0 s762 1 TEMP_CTL u100 2 TEMP_CTL u110 2 ture TEMP_CTL u120 2 MOtwoy periodical TEMP_CTL u300 2 s762 0 Forced execution of macro commands TEMP_READ and TEMP_WRITE using the temperature control network PLC2Way table When any station that has failed is included in the specified table the macro command is not executed The macro command is forcibly executed to the stations that are 0 Other than 0 working properly ie D mis D Q fe 3 3 Cc gt O D En o gt a ED 8 Temperature Control Network 8 Temperature Control Network Temperature Control Network e Using the temperature control network the V7 series can be connected to the
249. re is any problem it does affect the communication speed e When the setting value is small It will not take a long time before restoration e When the setting value is large It will take a longer time before restoration Supplemental Information Retrials in the Detail tab window of the Comm Parameter dialog is the number of retrials that the V7 series sends an inquiry to the PLC For Send Delay Time Total and Retry Cycle the same values must be set on all the V7 series that are connected in the same communication line ep oO D O 3 3 a 5 O je O n EN 5 Universal Serial Communications B Universal Serial Communications Universal Serial Communications e A general purpose computer or an ASCII unit of the PLC master station controls the V7 series slave station using dedicated commands Dedicated commands General purpose computer Read V7 series So Wie 9o0ee00 0 Interrupt RS 232C or RS 422 RS 485 The V7 series internal user memory addresses u must be used for memory allocation for switch lamp or data display parts When the master station specifies a screen number data is written to the internal memory address u allocated for the screen If the screen is switched internally the new screen number is read and is written to the internal memory address u allocate
250. ress the SYSTEM switch and the F1 switch Main Menu screen Main Menu_ V710iTD 2002 4 1 07 23 30 System Information Front UF DRV VER 1240 SYSTEMPROG VER 1 000 VER 1 300 1 000 1 000 MELSEG QnH O ENGLISH CPU Port Screen Data PLC Type MITSUBISHIGnH sees CPU Information Cormont es Size 5111808 Error Stop Time Out 1 00 seo Retty 3 Multi Link Baud Rate 19200 Signal Level RS232C Barat f PLC Stat No 0 ti Baud ate 18200 Paty Odd Delay 20msec Send E Mult nk Own Stat No 1 Total 2 Ethemet information Trans Speed 10BASE T Sil No 192 168 168 MAC 050F000035 Felli VO Test e The Main Menu screen indicates the V7 series model system information and screen data information e The Main Menu screen is the system menu screen for transferring screen data between a personal computer and the V7 series When transferring screen data from a personal computer to the V7 series this Main Menu screen must be displayed However if Editor Port is selected for Modular Jack 1 or on line editing is used it is not necessary to bring up this screen 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 23 V7 series model Font data versions country local font 2002 4 1 07 23 30
251. ries Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even RS 232C Transmission mode RS 422 Channel 0 not supported a Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 Protocol Full duplex fixed Error check BCC fixed Response NO fixed Micro Logix 1000 Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port 0 0 Parity None fixed Not provided oe Data length 8 fixed 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 fixed 1 Error check CRC fixed O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt oO v z O a 11 Allen Bradley PLC Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs PLC 5 Series Memory TYPE Remarks N integer 0 B bit 1 T ACC timer current value 2 T PRE timer set value 3 C ACC counter current value 4 C PRE counter set value 5 input 6 O output 7 S status 8 T timer control 9 Cc counter control 10 R control 11 R LEN control data length 12 R POS control data position 13 D BCD 14 A ASCII 15 SLC500 Series Micro Logix 1000 11 Allen Bradley PLC
252. river Sys Program Cancel JNE e POWER 1 Connecting the CREC Check on the Port Selection field that the CREC cable CREC CP is connected to a modular jack port e MJ1 Connect the CREC to the MJ1 port Normally MJ1 is selected Port Selection e MJ2 Connect the CREC to the MJ2 port Only when AS Memory Card is selected for Modular Jack 2 MJ2 is indicated in the Port Selection field 2 Mounting the Memory Card Insert a memory card into the card recorder CREC 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 2 13 3 Memory Card Information Press the Modular Jack MJ1 MJ2 switch The memory card information contained in the inserted memory card is indicated Switches in the Data Selection field and Transfer field become active Port Selection CREC Menu A a ha 5 Memory Card Information Return Modular Jack MJ1 Sys Program Version Font Date Version 1 F Driver YOKOGAWA FA Version 1 250 Screen PLC Type YOKOGAWAFA M3 Screen Comment Display gt Card o bata saection Display lt gt Card 4 Data Selection and Transfer Selection In the Transfer field select Display lt Card Display gt Card or Display lt gt Card Press the desired switch to turn the switch on Multiple switches can be pressed in the Data Selection field
253. rovides a communication protocol communication profile that supports system hierarchy i e DP and FMS e When the V7 series is equipped with the communication interface unit CU 04 is mounted PROFIBUS DP communications can be performed Master I PROFIBUS DP RS 485 Slave VI CU 04 ores d The V7 series can work as a slave station on PROFIBUS DP A maximum of 12 Mbps is available automatically set to the BUS baud rate The signal level is RS 485 The V7 series can only communicate with the master PLC e PROFIBUS DP supports I O communications only With I O communication it is not possible to directly access the device memory DB or MW used in the CPU To enable the V7 series to have direct access to these memory devices Hakko Electronics supplies the function ladder file for message communications When this function is loaded in the master CPU message communications using the Hakko Electronics original protocol are enabled and the V7 series can have access to any memory address f F DB Q MW F mi 7 Ve ba DB Q MW v7 Master PLC Load Hakko Electronics function ladder file e For the procedure of loading Hakko Electronics function refer to the
254. ry card at one time according to the temperature control network PLC2Way table 7 PLC2Way Temperature Control Network PLC2Way Table 1 Starting Click System Setting gt Temp CTRL PLC2Way Setting gt Temp CTRL PLC2Way Network Table Temp CTRL PLC2Way Network Table becomes active only when the setting in the Temp Control PLC2way Comm Setting dialog has been completed as described in the previous section PLC Type Comm Parameter Edit Model Selection Unit Setting Font Setting Function Switch Setting Buffering Area Setting Memory Card Setting CF Card Setting Printer Setting Video Setting Sound Setting Barcode Setting Cae Set the temperature control network PLC2Way 0 Time Display Format table number 0 to 31 and click OK SRAM Clock Setting Attribute Table MR400 Format Table 02 oO v O O 3 3 Cc gt O seb e Temp Control Networ o n Modbus Slave Communication Setting gt Temp CTRL PLC2Wa V Temp CTRL PLC2Way Comm Setting Network Table Setting Temp CTRL Pl Table Station Number Table Settina The Temp Network PLC2Way Table Edit window is opened Temp Network PLC2Way Table 0 Edit No Temp CTRIJPLC2 Mem Target PLC Memory Target Internal Memory 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 l There are 32 tables of temperat
255. ry cassette information setting 0 FONT TF ORV VER 1 300 VER 1 300 1 000 1 000 MELSEC AnAINIU ENGLISH PLC Type MITSUBISHIA series Link ment Error Stop Time Out 1 00 sec Retry 3 Connection 1 1 Battery Replacement Safety Instructions on Handling the Battery Lithium batteries contain combustible material such as lithium or organic solvent Mishandling may cause heat explosion or ignition resulting in fire or injury To prevent accidents pay attention to the following cautions when handling the lithium battery Z CAUTION Be sure to discharge static electricity from your body before battery replacement Use the battery V7 BT replacement battery for the V7 series for replacement Rough handling of the battery may cause a fire or chemical burn hazard Do not disassemble incinerate or heat the battery above 212 F Observe the local and governmental regulations when disposing of waste batteries Keep batteries out of reach of children If swallowed immediately consult a doctor Never re charge the battery When the battery leaks or smells the leaking battery electrolyte may catch a fire Keep from heat or flame 9 Coin type Lithium Battery Battery Replacement Procedure Replacement batteries are available from Hakko Electro
256. s Please take note of this Pressing two positions at the same time activates the switch in the center Notes on Disposal e At the time of disposal MONITOUCH must be treated as industrial waste Contents Chapter 1 Hardware Specifications Hix O TA 1 1 2 Models and Peripheral Equipment eeeeceeesseeeeenneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeneeeeeneneeess 1 2 MONITOUCH Models Peripheral Equipment 3 System COMPOSITION cra heal 1 7 System Composition of V7 Standard eee eee cece e esse eens sees nro nan n anna rancia 1 7 System Composition of V7i High perforMance ooconniccnnncinoconocanncncnanonano nana conocia narco non cnn rca 1 8 42 SPCCHICALIONS cuina eerie einen 1 9 General SpecificationS oocooneonocconannnanncannnnonnnonannnnannnrncanncnnrnc nen ran nnannc nora rn cc rnonccnn nr no nrnn nos 1 9 Display Specification 1 10 Touch Panel Specifications ooococonccnoonnnrnanonaconencannnonencnrnaanenconenonnnrann cono ncnnannnrncone nro anorcannos 1 10 Function Switch Specifications oooonocccnnncnocacicacinanananananc cnn crono ran crac anna nnn cr nn nano nro canina 1 11 Interface Specifications ooocoomonoccrornnarncanennnrnnrannnoncncnoncnnnaonnnonnnnrnennannn nr nanna anno ncone rre nana nens 1 11 Clock and Backup Memory SpecificatiONS oononncinniniccnnnconnccnnonccorncn na nanc cnn crac ran nc nora naci 1 11 Drawing ENvVirONMeNt
257. s gateway and sub mask settings Moves back to the Main Menu screen Ethernet Selects 10BASE T or AUI IP Address 0 C0 C0 Cursor switches Gate Way 0 0 O 1 Sub mask 0 0 O Increment Decrement switch for the value in the cursor position F eee Determines the setting such as IP address ore As and moves back to the Main Menu screen Used for checking the 10BASE T interface Normal Connect Error Disconnect Select either 10BASE T or AUI for the connecting method Set the IP address If necessary set the default gateway and subnet mask Press the Setting Finished switch The settings are determined The Main Menu screen is displayed again Poo hes e Rotary Switch and Network Table Register IP addresses and other information for the V series PLCs or computers that should be included for Ethernet communications on the V SFT editor System Setting gt Network Table Setting gt Ethernet gt Edit Network Table Set the network table number with the rotary switch on the communication interface unit CU 03 File Edit View Help ge ale see e Edit Network Table Port number to be set with the rotary switch on the communicanon fo Y Host Name IP Address Send Timeout Internal Memory Write Memory Card Me
258. s of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows A Series Link Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port 0 for both stations x10 x1 0 Parity Even Even Transmission RS 232C MODE1 Trans Mode 1 mode RS 422 MODES Trans Mode 1 2 Data length 7 7 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Sumcheck Provided fixed Write while running Possible fixed Terminating resistance at sender Provided fixed Terminating resistance at receiver Provided fixed 1 Trans Mode 1 without CR LF Trans Mode 4 with CR LF If Trans Mode 4 is selected for Trans Mode in the Comm Parameter dialog of the V7 series select MODE4 in the case of RS 232C or MODE8 in the case of RS 422 QnA Series Link QnH Q Series Link Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 19200 bps 19200 bps Port O for both stations x10 x1 0 Parity Even Even n RS 232C i Transmission mode MODES binary mode fixed RS 422 a Data length 8 fixed Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Sumcheck Provided fixed Write while running Possible fixed The maximum baud rate available with the V7 series is 115200 bps Select the appropriate baud rate depending on the used PLC and environment A Series CPU QnA Series CPU Communication parameters for the V7 series are automatically set 1 MITSUBISHIPLC MEN
259. s with the PLC are shown below RS 422 Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 15 pin male C Use shielded twist pair cables R 120 Q 1 2 W O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a 5 88 14 TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 14 TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection Port on the CPU unit TC200 TCCMW on f TC200 TCCMO RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 TCmini Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port 1 1 Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks D register 1 0 B register 2 1 X input relay 2 XW as word device Y output relay 5 YW as word device R temporary storage 6 RW as word device G extension temporary storage 1 7 GW as word device H extension temporary storage 2 8 HW as word device L latch relay 9 LW as word device S shift register 10 SW as word device E edge relay 11 EW as word device P timer counter current value 12 V timer counter set value 13 T timer 14
260. s zero IP Address Gate Way Sub mask x Port No 10000 J suonye1adO HONOLINOW 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i The cursor moves only in these sections for settings Set the IP address If necessary set the default gateway and subnet mask 2 Press the Setting Finished switch The IP address is determined 3 The Main Menu screen is displayed again If the Ethernet screen is displayed from the initial screen the initial screen is displayed again Use Network Table In the following cases select Use Network Table e The network table is set for screen data of the V7 series and you would like to change the network table number When the network table is used Use Network Table It is not used when the gate way or the sub mask IP Address 0 0 0 0 is zero Gate Way 0 0 O 0 i Sub mask Ol 0 0 0 i Port No 10000 i Network Table No L0 Set the network table number Indicates the contents of the selected network table number 1 Set the network table number 2 Press the Setting Finished switch The IP address is determined 3 The Main Menu screen is displayed again 2 26 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu Connection with CU 03 on V7 IP addres
261. side This connection diagram shows the case where the shielded cable is connected on the V7 series side When connecting the shielded cable to the V7 series side connect it to pin 1 of the connector or the connector case cover e Twisted pairs of 0 3 mm sq or above are recommended v70 CN10 Shield Signal Name Pin No i a Se od 07 NS ia ci FG 4 fe ik SD 2 4 gt RD 3 gt RS 4 po cs 5 4 SG 7 7 gt 1 Send data To the PLC s RS232C port Receive data e f noise disturbs communications use twist pair cables between SD SG and RD SG v70 CN1g Shield Signal Name Pin No a i a a 0 A ee ee ee ee ee FG 1 pa L SD 2 A RD 3 lt gt RS 4 a gt cs 5 i SG 7 To the PLC s RS232C port Receive data SG SG Send data 1 1 1 Connection dE RS 422 485 Connection e Connect twist pair cables between SD SD and RD RD e If the PLC has the terminal for signal ground SG be sure to connect a wire e Connect the shielded cable either to the V7 series or PLC side This connection diagram shows the case where the shielded cable is connected on the V7 series side When connecting the shielded cable to the V7 series side connect it to pin 1 of the connector or the connector case cover e To use a terminal block for connection use Hakko Electronics TC485 optio
262. stance Grounding Grounding resistance less than 100 Q Protection structure front panel compliant with IP65 when using gasket 2 rear case compliant with IP20 2 ae Form in a body E Mounting procedure inserted in a mounting panel O Cooling System Cooling naturally Z R E Weight kg Unit approx 1 5 Unit approx 2 4 Unit approx 2 7 a Dimensions W x H x D mm 233 x 178 x 66 1 303 8 x 231 0 x 72 0 326 4 x 259 6 x 72 0 Panel Cut out mm 220 5 x 165 5 5 289 0 x 216 2 313 0 3 x 246 2 3 Case Color Black Munsell N2 0 Material PC PS resin Tarflon 1 10 4 Specifications Display Specifications e Model os V708S V708iS V710T V710iT V710S V710iS V712S V712iS a STN Display Device color LCD TFT color LCD Elective Display 7 7 inch 8 4 inch 10 4 inch 12 1 inch Area G lare 128 colors 32 768 colors 16 color blinks 16 color blinks Resolution W x H dots 640 x 480 800 x 600 640 x 480 800 x 600 Petr iteh 0 246 x 0 246 0 213x0 213 0 33x0 33 0 264x0 264 0 3075 x 0 3075 W x H mm Brightness cd m 200 350 350 280 350 Contrast Ratio 25 1 250 1 300 1 300 1 350 1 Angle ot vertical 40 30 35 55 45 55 35 45 40 45 Visibility Angle of Horizontal Visibility 50 50 70 50 55 Backlight Cold cathode rectifier exchangeable by users Backlight Average Approx Life 40 000 h
263. sult with the network administrator 1 Ethernet 4 17 IP Address This is an address that is used for recognizing each node on the Ethernet and should be unique The IP address is 32 bit data which consists of the network address and the host address and can be classified into A to C depending on the network size Network Class A Ol address 7 Host address 24 Class B 0 Network address 14 Host address 16 Class C 110 Network address 21 Host address 8 Notation A string of 32 bit data is divided into four and each segment delimited with a period is in decimal notation Example The IP address in class C shown below is represented as 192 128 1 50 11000000 10000000 00000001 00110010 Send Timeout Set the time out time for the V7 series to send a command on the Ethernet Port No 2049 to 65535 Default 10000 Set the port number The port number may be fixed depending on the PLC model Refer to the instruction manual for the PLC Example YOKOGAWA FA M3 12289 Fixed MITSUBISHI Q series auto open UDP port 5000 Default changeable by sequence Port No Multiple applications are running on each node and communications are carried out for each application between the nodes Consequently it is necessary to have a means to identify the application that data should be transferred to The port number works as this identifier Each port number is 16 bit data from 0 to
264. t Card Menu Screen Ethernet SRAM Clock Extension Program Information 7 Extended Function Setting DPPN 2 Function Switches Types SYSTEM Switch 3 Errors Displayed on the V7 Series 1 Communication Error 2 Check 3 Warning 4 SYSTEM ERROR 5 Touch Switch is Active 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu 2 1 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu Initial Screen When the power of MONITOUCH is turned on for the first time the Main Menu screen shown below on the left is displayed Initial screen displayed when power is Main Menu screen after transferring screen data turned on for the first time Main Menu V710iTD 2002 4 1 07 23 30 o FH Ze system System Informatior Ma AE PE erm 1001100 Ea ENGLISH CPU Pon Transfer the screen data Screen Data PLC Type MITSUBISHIONH O series CPU Error Stop e ES Information comment Time Qut 1 00 sec SEE 2 Size 5789552 a HAZ own Sa Not Sgrai Lel R8232 maina sates E Rey do PLC Stat No 0 Stop Bt 1 Baud Rate 115200 Parity Odd na E HABIZA Send Delay 20msec SHAcloleHs HEAT O o o Ethernet FA g ensal Ro 182 188 168 PORT 10000 Card 0 MAC 050FF000035 cern fies Transferring Screen Data for the First Time There are four methods for transferring screen data for the first t
265. t pair cables Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a PLC 1 E gt D sub 9 pin male N a o n Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 5 MATSUSHITA PLC RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male iy seas los gt I I b I I 12 EEIE i H 13 i i T i i j l 24 o de I I l a d 25 a ci Bele Ae z Use shielded twist pair cables 6 YOKOGAWA PLC MEX 6 YOKOGAWA PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type CPU Unit Port Connection PLC2Way LC01 0N RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 x FA500 FA500 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 x LC02 0N em A RS 422 Wiring Diagram 3 x Programming tool port YOKOGAWAS s ladder transfer O on the CPU module cable KM11 2N a F3LC01 1N FAMS Enis RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 O F3LC11 1N O F3LC11 2N RS 422 Wiring Diagram 3 O Programming tool port YOKOGAWASs ladder transfer O FA M3R FA M3 R onthe CPU module cable KM11 2N F3LC12 1F RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 O 1 The CPUs that can be connected directly to the programming tool port on the CPU module are F3SP21 0N F3SP25 2N F3SP35 5N F3SP28 3N F3SP38 6N F3SP53 4H and F3SP58 6H 2 When the
266. ta is not read while the data is read from the PLC connected at the MJ port When the temperature control network PLC2Way table is used Fig b PLC data is read while the data is read from the PLC connected at the MJ port Consequently it is possible to communicate with the PLC connected at the MJ port without reducing the processing capacity between the V7 lt the PLC When the temperature control network PLC2Way table is used If periodical reading of the PLC data is performed while the PLC connected at the MJ port is accessed using a macro command the macro execution may be delayed It is possible to temporarily stop periodical reading from the PLC connected at the MJ port using the system memory address s762 For more information refer to page 3 51 EZB 7 Pi c2way Notes on Screen Data Transfer Temperature Control PLC2 Program When using the temperature control network PLC2Way communications it is necessary to transfer the temperature control PLC2 program to the V7 series When the temperature control network PLC2Way setting has been made the program is automatically transferred to the V7 series together with screen data When Temp PLC2 is selected in the Transfer dialog only the temperature control PLC2 program can be transferred to the V7 series CN x Transfer Device Transfer Data Display C Memory Screen Data C IF Driver C Program I Use Simulator JT Read comments in data transfer I Allidat
267. ted data amount is different from the count value Check 1 2 3 described below Command error applicable to MITSUBISHI CPU Q link unit The response code differs from the expected code Check 1 2 3 described below Invalid cassette applicable to MITSUBISHI ACPU This cassette is not included in the memory cassettes currently being supported Contact your local distributor Password error applicable to MITSUBISHI QCPU The password is incorrect Contact your local distributor Solution 1 Confirm link unit settings After making settings cut power to the PLC 2 Go to the editor V SFT and confirm the settings in the Comm Parameter dialog in the System Setting menu 3 If errors only occur from time to time it is possible that there is a noise based communication error If you still cannot solve the error even after following the suggestions above contact your local distributor O Z 4 O Cc O I O O e gt Mm Error Messages for Network Communication e Ethernet 3 Errors Displayed on the V7 Series Error Message Contents Solution Ethernet Error XXXX The Ethernet status is saved at system memory address s518 and a code other than 0 normal is received XXXX Error No For the contents and solution to each error number refer to Chapter 4 Network Communications Error Display e MELSECNET 10
268. temperature controller With RS 232C one PLC can be connected with RS 485 a maximum of 31 temperature controllers can be connected PLC V7 series 60000 00 Temperature controller an D ma e Data of temperature controllers connected to the V7 series can be set or monitored e Periodical reading sampling of temperature controller data Temperature controller data can be read into the PLC memory or V7 internal memory at regular intervals using the temperature control network table It is also possible to save the read data in the V7 internal buffer SRAM or CF card e Data transfer It is also possible to transfer data in the PLC memory V7 internal memory or a memory card to the temperature controller at one time using a macro command Conversely data in the temperature controller can be transferred to the PLC memory V7 internal memory or a memory card at one time e For more information on compatible temperature controllers and the required settings refer to Temperature Control Network Network Communications Ethernet FL net OPCN 2 MELSECNET 10 CC Link OPCN 1 T LINK PROFIBUS DP OY O R GON ies 1 Ethernet 4 1 1 Ethernet Ethernet e Transferring data in memory Data in memory can be transferred to the V7 series on the Ethernet or to the PLCs linked to the V7 series as a host by using macro commands EREAD EWRITE Ethernet
269. tes their respective holders 1 This manual may not in whole or in part be printed or reproduced without the prior written consent of Hakko Electronics Co Ltd 2 Information in this manual is subject to change without prior notice 3 Windows and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries 4 All other company names or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of 5 This manual is intended to give accurate information about MONITOUCH hardware If you have any questions please contact your local distributor Notes on Safe Use of MONITOUCH In this manual you will find various notes categorized under the following levels with the signal words DANGER and CAUTION gt Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in DANGER death or serious injury Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in caution ly minor or moderate injury and could cause property damage Note that there is a possibility that the item listed with CAUTION may have serious ramifications lt gt DANGER e Never use the input function of MONITOUCH for operations that may threaten human life or to damage the system such as switches to be used in case of emergency Please design the system so that it can cope with malfunction of a touch switch e
270. the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Connection Multi Link fixed Parity Odd Odd a Data length 8 fixed 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks MW memory word 0 KW constant word 1 M bit memory 2 28 Telemecanique PLC GED Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 485 Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC Use shielded twist pair cables O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a 29 Automationdirect PLC 29 Automationdirect PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection D4 430 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 D4 440 Port 1 on a CPU unit RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 Direct LOGIC D4 450 Port 3 on a CPU unit RS 485 Wiring Diagram 6 Port 2 on a CPU unit mm RS 232C Wiring Diagram 2 D2 240 Port 2 on a CPU unit D2 250 Port 2 on a CPU unit RS 232C Wiring Diagram 3 D4 430 RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 D4 440 Port 1 on a CPU unit RS 422 Wiring Diagram 5 D4 4850 Port 0 on a CPU unit RS 232C Wiring Diagram 4
271. the access folder name of screen data is the same as that in the CF card the CF card file information is indicated on the screen and data in the V7 series overwrites the CF card data Note that the CF card data is lost when data in the V7 series overwrites When the CF card file information is blank a new file DSP0000 BIN is created in the DSP folder 3 During data transfer the Start switch changes into Busy and flashes When data has been transferred successfully the following window is displayed Work normally finished Press the OK switch The CF card file information shows data that has been transferred If any other message is displayed refer to page 2 23 4 Press the Return switch The Card Menu screen is displayed again O Z 4 O E O I O O g gt 0 2 20 1 Operation of V7 Main Menu When Display lt gt Card is Selected 1 When Display lt gt Card is selected the Card Transfer screen is displayed Screen data used for comparison is that in the DSP folder under the folder having the same name as the access folder that is set by the V SFT editor Flashes during communication with the CF card Card Transfer CF Card File Infomation Access Indicates the name of the currently selected folder DSP0000 BIN 2002 03 20 10 58 56 Indicates the free space in the CF card Sys Program V710 V712 Version 1 010 Font Date
272. the file number set in the Memory Card Setting dialog of the V SFT editor Record No Specify the record number set in the Memory Card Setting dialog of the V SFT editor System reserved Enter 0 30 in the ASCII code for the number of bytes The number of bytes for system reserved varies depending on the model Example Model No of Bytes Code Hexadecimal ASCII V7 internal memory 10 0000000000H 30303030303030303030 6 v Link EZ Sum Check Code SUM 2 bytes Data is added up SUM and the lower one byte 8 bits of the sum is converted into the 2 digit ASCII code hexadecimal A sum check code is shown below Example Transmission mode without CR LF with sum check Command 20 data read Address 10 words from u1000 03E8H When reading a sum check will be performed as shown below STX Aa Command eae net ee Address System reserved ETX SUM 01H 20H OAH 00H 00H 03E8H 0000000000H BQH 02H 30H31H 32H30H 30H41H 30H30H 30H30H 30H 33H 45H 38H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 03H 42H39H v 02H 30H 31H 32H 30H 30H 41H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 33H 45H 38H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 03H 4B9H ie D m D Q e 3 3 E gt o i o gt a Response Code 2 bytes ACK This code is received at normal termination 00H 3030 ASCII NAK
273. tring of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX TRUE FALSE Get using HKEtn_GetLastError 1 Ethernet 4 41 Others Functions Initialization Function int HKEtn_Init unsigned short Port 10000 int Retry 3 int RecvTime 2 int RecvTime2 10 Creates a socket e Parameters Port Set 10000 or above Retry Number of send retrials RecvTime Receive timeout RecvTime2 Receive timeout 2 e Return values Success TRUE zZ Failure FALSE z Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError 9 S Receive Wait from V7 3 int HKEtn_Recvfrom BYTE dp short IpCnt S This function is retained internally until data is received from the V7 series The function 8 returns a response and ends only when a command is received The user should interpret S the received data and create the next action This function must be executed within the EE thread e Parameters dp Top pointer of receive buffer Allocate 5000 bytes IpCnt Returns the number of bytes received e Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError Cancel Receive Wait Function void HKEtn_Cancel void Cancels the function in the receive wait status such as Recvfrom ET Ethernet Request Connection Information int HKEin_Getinf struct inf Ipinf char IpAddr e Parameters Ipinf All 0 IpAddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example 192 168 XXX XXX e Return values Suc
274. tting Available Memory esia eaaa reana decida MO ies A aa eS ee ee te nee 16 SHINKO PLG cut td chia Ny E 5 98 Available PLE Savia rt a tiv A AA A E R 5 98 COMMUNICATION Setting cirio A ea 5 98 Available MeModIY viciosa diia 5 98 WI Dista tte 5 99 17 SAMSUNG P LES face deck neste eis Rie Ree ee eae al 5 100 Available PLE a 5 100 Communication SettinQ oonoccnnnnnnonnnnonnnonananannnn nono conan anar coronan nn nn nncnn nn nnn nc nan n narra nena nan nn nan ccna nos 5 100 Available Momor sa a 5 100 VIO diri ee notar cered maternal caus Cae Lo ELO 5 101 19 KEYENCE PL Csiciuciuiciiis a diia 5 102 Available PLO Scsi i i aeaa 5 102 COMMUNICATION SOMING sessur AAA N r 5 103 Available Memory 0000 aa a onh e 5 104 Available PLCs COMMUNICATION SOMA Available MeMO cat cece stearate hick det gate Fetes yas te aad se conan A ROSAS WI O 20 FANUC Pi Curl e ee ee ds 21 FATEK AUTOMATION PLC Available PLG Sinza A a Communication SettinQ ooniccnnnnnnnninnoninonnnannnnnn nono nananc nan coronan cnc no nn cn nana cren cnn rre nan n nc ann canas Available Memory 22 IDEC PL Gorroen A eres oe ee Available PLCS vii AA htdarer eer dt Communication Setting 2 25 eines tents dia iia Anes es Available Memory 4 4 0 i does i et eee do doe tins ANTI ad A A E E cerrerrt reer rire 23 MODIGON PEGs odia NEUE AR O ats ffetensensidesdcchaavecateyen cease genes cent aN COMMUNICATION AA di 24 YAMATAKE PLC ono add
275. unication interface unit CU 00 must be mounted When the V7 series is equipped with the communication interface unit CU 00 it becomes an OPCN 1 ready device e The V7 series that supports OPCN 1 communications is a programmable display that can perform data transfer with the master station PLC etc in compliance with JEM F3008 programmable controller field network standard level 1 normally called OPCN 1 that is determined by the Japan Electrical Manufacturers Association e The GET PUT service is supported and communications with the PLC can be performed without program in the same way as communications via a link unit e The V7 series that supports OPCN 1 communications falls in the TYPE S511 class TYPE S 5 111 Insulated Not insulated l Insulated U Not insulated Wiring method 1 2 wire connection _ 2 3 wire connection Transmission range 1 125 kbps 4 1 Mbps 2 250 kbps 3 500 kbps Unit type M Master A Master Slave e Itis possible to perform high speed communications by connecting multiple slave stations to one master station PLC Example System configuration with two V7 series PLC Master station gt lt va va a JPCN 1 JPCN 1 ol A h ready product ready product va o o Robot Solenoid valve o
276. unications are performed at 9600 bps Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs KZ Series Link Memory TYPE Remarks DM data memory 0 CH input output relay 1 18 KEYENCEPLC EXT KZ A500 CPU MITSUBISHI A Series Link Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 WwW link register 1 R file register 2 TN timer current value 3 CN counter current value 4 M internal relay 6 L latch relay 7 B link relay 8 X input relay 9 Y output relay 10 TS timer contact 11 TC timer coil 12 CS counter contact 13 CC counter coil 14 3 KZ KV Series CPU KZ24 300 CPU KV10 24 CPU KV 700 CPU a Memory TYPE Remarks 5 DM data memory 0 o CH input output relay 1 TC timer current value 2 CC counter current value 3 TS timer set value 4 CS counter set value 5 T timer contact 6 C counter contact 7 TM temporary data memory 8 CTH high speed counter current value 9 KV700 only CTC high speed counter comparator setting 10 KV700 only value CT high speed counter comparator contact 11 KV700 only CR control relay 12 KV700 only CM control relay 13 KV700 only G8 KEVE
277. ure control network PLC2Way table No 0 to 31 A maximum of 128 addresses of the PLC2 memory can be set for each table 2 Closing Click Close in the drop down menu or click the Close button at the top right corner Temp Network PLC2Way Table 0 Edit amp Restore Data Type Target PLC Memory 3 Comment setting There are 32 temperature control network PLC2Way tables and a comment can be set for each table Click Edit gt Comment The Comment Setting dialog is displayed Temp Network PLC2Way Table 0 Edit aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa maa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaad No Temp CTRIJPLC2 Mem Name 0 Text Data Cancel l 7 PLC2Way Enter the desired comment and click OK The entered comment is displayed at the top right corner 4 Setting data in the table Click on a line in the table The selected line turns blue Temp Network PLC2Way Table 0 Edit Click Cia Temn CTAI IPI C Mem Nata Tune Tarnet PLC Temp Network PLC2Way Table 0 Edit aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Temp CTRIJPLC2 Mem 0 D00100 Target PLC Memory Target Internal Memory u00100 1 Click Memory Input PLC2 Memory MITSUBISHI Ona x Type bp a m Eo p L saone FP elele py el 2 Click Word y Double Word Bit v 3 Double click remp CRTL PL
278. utput relay Y 5 WY as word device R file register W 6 TN timer current value TN 7 CN counter current value CN 8 T timer contact T 9 Cc counter contact Cc 10 WS step relay Not provided 11 FLEX PC COM T NJ Computer Link Toyota Version Memory TYPE Remarks D data register 0 R link register 1 M internal relay 2 WM as word device K latch relay 3 WK as word device X input relay 4 WX as word device Y output relay 5 WY as word device W file register 6 TN timer current value 7 CN counter current value 8 T timer contact 9 Cc counter contact 10 Z special register 12 V special relay 13 WV as word device Q O J gt D on o 5 Le O v O 1 END o Furic Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male SD RD RS DR 2 3 4 CS 5 6 SG 7 8 Use shielded twist pair cables Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male CD NJ B16 D sub 15 pin male RD w Use shielded twist pair cables CTS RTS N IA A O N SG 9 FUIPLC END RS 485 Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables RS 422 Wiring Diagram 4 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male O
279. v z O a 24 YAMATAKE PLC 24 VAMATAKE PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port Connection MX series MX200 MX50 ASCII connector RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V7 series is as follows Item Setting on PLC V7 Comm Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port 1 1 Parity Even Even o Data length 8 8 Transmission code Stop bit 1 1 Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used Use TYPE when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs Memory TYPE Remarks R data register 0 M auxiliary relay 1 L latch relay 2 X input relay 3 Y output relay 4 TP timer current value 5 TS timer setting value 6 CP counter current value 7 CS counter set value 8 T timer contact 9 Cc counter contact 10 P link register 11 24 YAMATAKE PLC EXE Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables O O gt 5 oO Q e 5 gt O v z O a 25 TAIAN PLC 25 TAIAN PLC Available PLCs Link Mode
280. ve particles from entering into MONITOUCH Failure to do so may lead to fire damage or malfunction To be continued CAUTION Notes on Maintenance and Operation e Hakko Electronics Co Ltd is not responsible for any damages resulting from repair overhaul or modification of MONITOUCH that was performed by an unauthorized person e Do not use thinners for cleaning because they may discolor the MONITOUCH surface Use alcohol or benzine commercially available e Do not use a sharp pointed tool when pressing a touch switch e Only experts are authorized to set up the unit connect the cables or perform maintenance and inspection e MONITOUCH is equipped with a lithium battery Lithium batteries contain combustible material such as lithium or organic solvent Mishandling may cause heat explosion or ignition resulting in fire or injury Read this manual and related manuals carefully and handle the lithium battery correctly as instructed e f a data receive error occurs when MONITOUCH and the counterpart PLC temperature controller etc are started atthe same time read the manual for the counterpart unit and handle the error correctly e Switch resolution of the MONITOUCH V7 series is determined by the analog type resistance film Do not press two or more positions on the screen at the same time If two or more positions are pressed at the same time the switch located between the pressed positions activate
281. w Overrun After one character is received the next Check 1 3 described below character is received before internal processing is completed Framing Although the stop bit must be 1 it is Check 1 2 3 described below detected as 0 Break detection SD TXD of the PLC connected at the MJ port remains at the low level Examine the connection between SD TXD of the PLC connected at the MJ port and RD RXD of the V7 series Solution 1 Check the parameter setting of the PLC connected at the MJ port and the setting in the Temp CTRL PLC2Way Comm Setting dialog 2 Check the cable connection 3 Data may be disrupted because of noise Fix noise If you still cannot solve the error even after following the suggestions above contact your local distributor e 5762 7 PLC2Way 3 51 Periodical reading that is set in the Temp CTRL PLC2Way Table Setting dialog can be suspended 0 Periodical reading is performed Other than 0 Periodical reading is suspended If periodical reading of the temperature control network PLC2Way table is performed while the PLC2 memory is being accessed using a macro command the macro execution will be delayed Fig a To avoid this periodical reading can be suspended using memory address s762 Fig b Fig a V7 communication cycle Temperature control network PLC2Way table periodical reading Fig b V7 communication cycle Tempe
282. when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs 90 Series Memory TYPE Remarks R data register 0 l input 1 Q output 2 90 Series SNP X O Memory TYPE Remarks R data register 0 a l input 1 2 Q output 2 M internal relay 3 G global relay 4 D Al analog input 5 pa AQ analog output 6 T temporary memory relay 7 S system status 8 Read only SA system status 9 SB system status 10 SC system status 11 END 2 GE Fanuc PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below RS 232C Wiring Diagram 1 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin 3 pr PLC D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables RS 485 Wiring Diagram 2 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC D sub 25 pin male Use shielded twist pair cables 12 GEFanucPLC ED Wiring Diagram 3 V7 CN1 D sub 25 pin male PLC FG AS Sas SSS aS ae D sub 15 pin male oy IA SG 7 mn de RTS A 6 I 1 I 1 SD 12 BN ov 7 SD 13 m A CTS B 8 l i I i RD 24 mi a RT 9 l l l RD 25 mar RD A 10 1 1 i l AARE DET RD B 11 1 l l a D SD A 12 1 l i I o E SD B 13 id os RTS B 14 1 1 1 1 WI et CTS A 15 Mb a ee A Use shielded twist pair cables O O 5 5 oO O e 5 O v O 19 13 TOSHIBA PLC 13 TOSHIBA PLC Ava
283. wire connection The multi link 2 master cable b V6 MLT is 3 m long If the distance c between the V7 series master station and the V7 series slave station is longer than 3 m use a terminal block and connect the cables Connection between V7 series slave station lt gt V7 slave station Use the RS 485 2 wire connection It is recommended that CN1 be equipped with a terminal converter TC485 set to 2 wire connection b c d e The maximum length between V7 series should be 500 m To avoid line noise problems connect one terminal only so that the shielded frame ground of each cable will not be connected between the V7 series The shielded frame ground of V6 MLT must be connected to the V7 series master station When the terminal converter TC485 is not used install jumpers between RD SD and RD SD 3 n 1 Connection Multi link2 ESE b c d e V7 master To be installed by the user V7 slave station V7 slave station V7 slave station station MJ1 2 Terminal block CN1 TC485 CN1 TC485 CN1 TC485 Signal Signal Signal Name Name Name FG FG FG E SD SD SD SD SD SD p iio i i ermo ii i i RD o i i a ii ij oR SG E i SG i i i SG Terminating Terminating Terminating Terminating resistance resistance resistance resistance ON OFF OFF OFF Terminating Resistance Setting e The terminati
284. xplained The internal user memory u is used for the indirect memory designation Designating the indirect memory e PLC2 memory Less than 16 bits 16 to 32 bits 15 87 0 15 87 0 n 0 Model Memory type n 0 Model Memory type n 1 Memory number address n 1 Memory number address upper n 2 00 Bit designation n 2 Memory number address lower n 3 00 Port number n 3 00 Bit designation n 4 00 Port number Model 03 PLC2 memory less than 16 bits 83 PLC2 memory 16 to 32 bits Memory type Depends on the PLC model Refer to Chapter 5 Connection to PLCs Available PLCs when setting Port number Set the port number of the PLC connected at the MJ port END co User Log Read for YOKOGAWA s PLC The user log set with YOKOGAWA s PLC FA M3 FA M3R connected at the MJ port can be read using the macro command TEMP_CTL Macro TEMP_CTL This macro command controls the operation set in the memory addresses starting from the one specified for FO for the number of words specified for F1 Usable Devices PLC Memory Internal Memory Constant Words Memory Card Indirect Designation FO O F1 O TEMP_CTL Temperature controller PLC2Way control function TEMP_CTL FO F1 FO u n F1 n n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 n 7 n 8 n 9 n 10 n 11 Words User log A a registration ee A CPU No 1 eee negaci n S
285. ys when connecting with OPCN 1 Do not attempt to perform word writing to special relays e T LINK Error Message Contents Solution T LINK I F Board Err The I F unit for T LINK has an error Contact your local distributor Network I O Access Err MONITOUCH is about to access exceeding the set number of input output words Check the memory for the network I O in the screen data file Access denied by Loader The PLC loader is being accessed so that processing is not performed on V7 This error occurs during program transfer from the PLC loader for most cases Wait for the PLVC loader to finish processing and press the RETRY switch on the V7 screen Communication Error Received Code No 36 The number of monitor registration points is too small Correct the number of monitor registration points For monitor registration refer to the user manual of the PLC you are using e PROFIBUS DP Error Message Contents Solution Time Out Check is displayed 2 or 3 seconds before this error occurs when connecting V7 and PROFIBUS DP in the RUN mode The setting for Own Stat No on V7 is discrepant with that for Address for V7 series on the SIMATIC Manager Check and correct the setting A screen is displayed instantaneously communications performed before this error occurs when connecting V7 and PROFIBUS DP in the RUN mode The DB addr

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"